fm-22001 potlatch containment facility · fm-22001 potlatch containment facility itd d2 potlatch...

Project Manual For:

Idaho Transportation Department District #2

FM-22001 Potlatch Containment Facility

ITD D2 Potlatch Site 1557 State Highway 6 Potlatch, Idaho 83855

Latah County

June 28, 2019

CKA Project Number: 19022

CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

Project Manual For:

Idaho Transportation Department District #2

FM-22001 Potlatch Containment Facility

ITD D2 Potlatch Site 1557 State Highway 6 Potlatch, Idaho 83855

Latah County

June 28, 2019

OWNER Idaho Transportation Department

PO Box 7129 Boise, ID 83707-1129

Phone: (208) 334-8600 Contact: Tony Pirc, Capital Facilities Manager

OWNER (LOCAL) ITD District #2

PO Box 837 2600 Frontage Road Lewiston, ID 83501

Phone: (208) 799-4256 Contact: Roy Hill

ARCHITECT Castellaw Kom Architects

850 Main Street Lewiston, Idaho 83501 Phone: (208) 746-0183

Fax: (208) 746-7267 Contact: Greg Castellaw, AIA

Ben Larsen, PM

STRUCTURAL TD&H Engineering

210 Main Street Lewiston, ID 83501

Phone (208) 746-0938 x113 Contact: Alfred Sanchez, PE

BOILERPLT-2009 dbb.doc (rev. 12/15/17) (ITD Project #FM-22001) (June 2019)

BOILERPLATE (USING TRADITIONAL DESIGN – BID – BUILD PROCESS)

CONTENTS C - 1 BOILERPLT-2009 dbb.doc (rev. 12/15/17) ITD Project # FM-22001) (June 2019)

CONTENTS ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS AB-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ITB-1 BID PROPOSAL BP-1

CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT CONCERNING ALCOHOL & DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE BP-4 BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENT STATEMENT BP-5

AGREEMENT – FIXED PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT FPCC-1

EXHIBIT A – OWNER’S PROJECT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION FPCC-31 EXHIBIT B – ADDRESSES AND AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES FPCC-32 EXHIBIT C – LIST OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FPCC-34 EXHIBIT D - CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT CONCERNING TAXES FPCC-36 EXHIBIT E – NAMED SUBCONTRACTORS FPCC-37 EXHIBIT F – NOTICE TO PROCEED FPCC-38 EXHIBIT G - CONTRACTOR’S REQUEST FOR TAX RELEASE FPCC-39 EXHIBIT H - RELEASE OF CLAIMS FPCC-40


TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary 01 23 00 Alternates 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 25 01 Substitution Request Form 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 77 01 Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 50 01 Existing Photos (For Reference Only) DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing DIVISION 04 – MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTIC, COMPOSITES NOT USED DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION NOT USED DIVISION 08 – DOORS AND WINDOWS NOT USED DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 90 00 Painting 09 96 10 Rubber Matting DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES NOT USED DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 90 10 Storage Tanks


DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS NOT USED DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems DIVISION 14 TO 21 – NOT USED DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 22 05 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 11 16 Brine, Boost, & Mag System Piping 22 11 19 Brine, Boost, & Mag System Specialties 22 11 23 Brine, Boost, & Mag System Pumps

DIVISON 23- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) NOT USED DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Electrical DIVISION 27 TO 28 – NOT USED DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 20 00 Earth Moving DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS NOT USED

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 46 00 Subdrainage


LIST OF DRAWINGS

SHEET DRAWINGS ARCHITECTURAL: A1.0 COVER, INDEX TO DRAWINGS, LIST OF ALTERNATES, VICINITY MAP, GENERAL

PROJECT NOTES, SITE PLAN A2.0 FLOOR PLAN, BUILDING ELEVATIONS, DETAILS A3.0 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES, STRUCTURAL SECTION. PLUMBING: P0.0 INDEX, LEGEND, AND SYMBOLS P3.0 SCHEDULES & SCHEMATICS P4.1 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN P5.0 PLUMBING DETAILS

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS AB - 1 BOILERPLT-2009 dbb.doc (rev. 12/15/17) (ITD Project #FM-22001) (June 2019)

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed bids will be received by the Idaho Transportation Department, State of Idaho, at 3311 State Street, Boise, Idaho 83707 until 1:59:59 PM Mountain local time, on July 24, 2019 for the ITD Project No. FM22001, ITD POTLATCH CONTAINMENT FACILITY. A description of the work of this project can be summarized to include the following: new 2,100 SF concrete containment foundation with pre-engineered metal building roof cover; painting exposed steel structure; de-icing solution storage tanks and associated plumbing; electrical includes new lighting, power receptacles, pump disconnects, and pump controls. Bids will be opened and publicly read at the above hour and date. Plans, specifications, proposal forms and other information are on file for examination at the following locations: Idaho Transportation Department, 3311 State Street, Boise, Idaho 83707, 208-334-8600 Associated General Contractors, 1649 W Shoreline Dr., Ste. 100, Boise, ID 83702 (208) 344-2531 www.nwagcplanroom.com Associated Builders & Contractors, 1760 E. Trent Ave., Spokane, WA 99202 Abadan Regional Plan Center, 603 E. 2nd Ave. Spokane, WA 99202 Spokane Regional Plan Center, 209 N. Havana, Spokane, WA 99202 Builder’s Exchange of Washington Inc., (425) 258-1303 www.bxwa.com Castellaw Kom Architects, 850 Main St. Lewiston, ID 83501 208-746-0183 A bid bond in the amount of 5% of the total bid amount, including any add alternates, is required. One set of documents may be obtained by licensed general contractors and by licensed mechanical and electrical subcontractors from the Architect (Engineer) for a refundable deposit of $200.00. Others may obtain documents at cost, non-refundable. A pre-bid conference will be held at the job-site on July 17, 2019 starting at 10:00 AM Pacific local time. Bidders are encouraged to attend. A Public Works Contractors License for the State of Idaho is required to bid on this work. Proof of a current Public Works Contractors License for the State of Idaho will be required of the successful bidder prior to award of a contract. Tony Pirc, Capital Facilities Manager IDAHO TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ITB-1 BOILERPLT-2009 dbb.doc (rev. 12/15/17) (ITD Project #FM-22001) (June 2019)

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

GENERAL PROVISIONS

DEFINITIONS: Capitalized terms used in these Instructions to Bidders (“Instructions”) shall have the meaning given to them in the Idaho Transportation Department’ Fixed Price Construction Contract Between Owner and Contractor.

HEADINGS: Headings used in these Instructions are for convenience only.

REJECTION OF BIDS, WAIVER OF INFORMALITIES OR CANCELLATION: Prior to the effective date of a contract, the Contracting Officer of Idaho Transportation Department shall have the right to accept or reject all bids, to waive any minor deviations/informalities or to cancel the bid. ORAL INFORMATION: Questions concerning a bid must be directed in writing to the designated Design Professional (architect or engineer) no less than ten (10) calendar days before bids are due unless provided otherwise via an addendum. Oral information is not binding and any reliance by a bidder on any oral information or representation is at the bidder’s sole risk. Any information given a prospective bidder in response to a written question will be provided to all prospective bidders by an addendum, if such information is necessary for purposes of submitting a bid or if failure to give such information would be prejudicial to uninformed bidders.

PUBLIC RECORDS: The Idaho Public Records Law, Title 74, Chapter 1, Idaho Code, allows the open inspection and copying of public records. Public records include any writing containing information relating to the conduct or administration of the public's business prepared, owned, used or retained by a State or local agency regardless of the physical form or character. Unless exempted by the Public Records Law, your bid will be a public record subject to disclosure under the Public Records Law. Any questions regarding the applicability of the Public Records Law should be addressed to your legal counsel prior to submission.

FORM OF AGREEMENT: Unless otherwise specified in the bid documents, the agreement between the successful bidder and the Owner (“State of Idaho”) shall be the Idaho Transportation Departments’ Fixed Price Construction Contract Between Owner and Contractor.

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS: A performance bond and payment bond are required for this Project, each in an amount of not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price. The performance and payment bonds shall be AIA Document A312, 1984 or the most recent Edition, or a standard surety form certified approved to be the same as the AIA A312 form and shall be executed by a surety or sureties reasonably acceptable to the Owner and authorized to do business in the State of Idaho. Bonds must be provided within ten (10) calendar days following receipt of a Notice of Intent to Award.

BID SUBMISSION PROCESS

BID DOCUMENTS: The bid documents are available from the Design Professional or as provided in the advertisement for bids. The responsibility is on the bidder to use a complete set of bid documents to prepare its bid and neither the Owner nor the Design Professional shall incur any liability for the


bidder’s failure to do so. Bidders obtain no ownership interest or any use rights, except to use in preparation of their bid, by issuance of the bid documents. Bidders and Sub-bidders shall field verify all dimensions pertaining to the Work and shall be responsible for the determination of all quantities of materials required for the completion of the Work. The bidder shall not rely on the scale drawings of the Bidding Documents in his determination of required materials quantities. No allowance shall be made for Bidder’s failure to field-verify dimensions. If a deposit is required, the deposit will be returned to a bidder returning the complete bid documents in good condition no more than twenty (20) days after a Notice of Intent is issued and the amount of any deposit returned may be reduced if the bid documents returned are not complete or are damaged. A bidder awarded a Contract may also keep the bid documents and any deposit will be returned. ADDENDA: In the event it becomes necessary to revise any part of the bid documents, addenda will be issued. Information given to one bidder will be available to all other bidders if such information is necessary for purposes of submitting a bid or if failure to give such information would be prejudicial to uninformed bidders. It is the bidder’s responsibility to check for addenda prior to submitting a bid. A bidder is required to acknowledge receipt of all addenda by identifying the addenda numbers in the space provided on the bid proposal form. Failure to do so may result in the bid being declared non-responsive. No addenda will be issued less than four (4) calendar days before the closing date unless the bid closing date is extended. REVIEW: It is the bidder’s responsibility to review the bid documents and compare them as needed, including with regard to any other work that is or may be under construction that might affect the bidder or its work, to examine the site and local conditions and to report, in writing, any questions, errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities to the Design Professional. PRODUCTS SPECIFIED AND PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS: Materials, products or equipment, if specified by name or manufacturer, establish the standard of quality required and that must be met by any proposed substitution. Requests for substitutions must be made in writing to the Design Professional no less than ten (10) calendar days prior to the bid closing unless provided otherwise via an addendum. Such requests must provide detailed information to allow the Design Professional to determine if the proposed substitution is acceptable, including drawings or performance or test data and a detailed statement of how the substitution would change any other part of the Work. It is the bidder’s obligation to satisfy this requirement and the Design Professional’s decision shall be final. To be allowed, substitutions must be approved in an addendum to the bid documents. BID FORM: Bids must be submitted on the bid proposal forms, or copies of forms, furnished by the Owner or the design professional. Bids submitted must contain all original signatures in ink on the following forms: Bid Proposal Form Contractor’s Affidavit Concerning Alcohol and Drug-Free Workplace Bidder’s Acknowledgment Statement Bid Bond (bid security) The person signing the Bid Proposal Form must initial any and all changes appearing on any of the bid forms. If the bidder is a corporation or other legal entity, the bid forms must be signed by an


authorized designee. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bid forms and/or signatures will not be considered. BID PRICES: The bid form may require bidders to submit bid prices for one (1) or more items on various bases, including lump sum base bid, lump sum bid alternate prices, unit prices or any combination thereof. Bid amounts shall be expressed in words and numbers. The amount in words shall prevail if there is a discrepancy.

ALTERNATES: If the solicitation includes alternate bid items or unit prices, failure to bid on the alternates or unit prices may disqualify the bid. If bidding on an alternate does not change the base bid, indicate by “No Change.” If bidding on all items is not required by the Contract Documents, bidders must affirmatively indicate that they are not bidding on those items.

TIME FOR SUBMISSION: Bids must be submitted on or before the time specified in the advertisement for bids. Any bid submitted late will be rejected. SEALED ENVELOPE: Bids shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the following clearly printed on the outside of the envelope: the Project number and Project name; the name and address of the bidder; and a statement, such as “BID ENCLOSED” to indicate that it is a bid. MAILED BIDS: When bids are mailed or shipped, the sealed envelope containing the bid shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation “SEALED BID ENCLOSED” on the face thereof. If mailed, the mailing envelope shall be addressed as follows:

IDAHO TRANSPORTATON DEPARTMENT Attn: Tony Pirc – SEALED BID PROJECT # FM22001

3311 State Street Boise, Idaho 83707 It is the bidder’s responsibility to ensure that its bid is delivered to the place designated for receipt on or before the specified closing time. The Owner assumes no responsibility for delays in the delivery of mail by the U.S. Post Office or private couriers. Bidders should be advised the intra-state mail system may increase delivery time from arrival to the place designated for receipt and should plan accordingly. LATE SUBMISSIONS WILL BE REJECTED, WILL NOT BE OPENED AND WILL BE RETURNED TO THE BIDDER. NO DEVIATIONS WILL BE ALLOWED. BID CLOSING DECLARED: Immediately prior to the bid opening, the Owner’s representative will declare the official bid closing. Any part of a bid not received prior to the bid closing declared by the designated representative will not be considered and will be returned to the bidder unopened. All bids shall be taken under advisement. DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE: Along with its bid, the bidder shall submit an affidavit certifying compliance with Title 72, Chapter 17, Idaho Code, requiring the Contractor and its subcontractors at the time of bid to provide a drug-free workplace program and to maintain such program throughout the duration of the Contract. The form of affidavit is attached. ILLEGAL ALIENS: Bidder shall warrant that the bidder does not knowingly hire or engage any illegal aliens or persons not authorized to work in the United States; bidder shall take steps to verify that it does not hire or engage any illegal aliens or persons not authorized to work in the United States; and


that any misrepresentation in this regard or any employment of persons not authorized to work in the United States constitutes a material breach and shall be cause for the imposition of monetary penalties and/or termination of any Contract resulting from this bid. LEGAL RESIDENCY REQUIREMENT: By submitting a bid, the bidder attests, under penalty of perjury, that he (the bidder) is a United States citizen or legal permanent resident or that it is otherwise lawfully present in the United States pursuant to federal law. Prior to being issued a contract, the bidder will be required to submit proof of lawful presence in the United States in accordance with §67-7903, Idaho Code. BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENT STATEMENT: The attached Bidder’s Acknowledgement Statement must be completed and included or the bid may be found non-responsive. PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE: This Project is not financed in whole or in part by federal funds. Bids will be accepted from those Contractors only (prime contractors, subcontractors and/or specialty contractors) who, prior to the bid opening, hold current licenses as public works contractors in the State of Idaho. IDAHO LABOR REQUIREMENTS: This Project is subject to the provisions of Sections 44-1001 and 44-1002, Idaho Code, dealing with labor preference. IDAHO PREFERENCE LAW: Section 67-2348, Idaho Code, requires the State of Idaho to apply a preference in determining which Contractor submitted the lowest responsible bid. If the Contractor who submitted the lowest dollar bid is domiciled in a state with a preference law that penalizes Idaho domiciled contractors, the Idaho Transportation Department must apply the preference law (percentage amount) of that domiciliary state to that Contractor’s bid. NAMING OF SUBCONTRACTORS: Section 67-2310, Idaho Code, requires general (prime) Contractors to include in their bid the name of the subcontractors who shall, in the event the Contractor secures the Contract, subcontract the plumbing, HVAC, and electrical work under the general (prime) Contract. Failure to name subcontractors as required by this section shall render any bid submitted by a general (prime) Contractor nonresponsive and void. Subcontractors named in accordance with the provisions of this section must possess an appropriate license or certificate of competency issued by the State of Idaho covering the Contractor work classification in which the subcontractor is named. The Idaho Transportation Department interprets Section 67-2310, Idaho Code, to mean three (3) separate areas of work: plumbing work, HVAC, and electrical work. The Idaho Transportation Department also requires that the general (prime) Contractor name the entity that will perform the Work, including if the entity is a subcontractor, a sub-subcontractor or the general (prime) Contractor submitting the bid. Failure to complete the Bid Proposal in full shall render a bid nonresponsive and void. With regard to possessing an appropriate license or certificate of competency, all subcontractors listed by the general (prime) Contractor must have at the time of the bid opening a current license in the appropriate category (class, type and specialty category) as issued by the Public Works Contractors State License Board. In addition, plumbing, HVAC and electrical subcontractors shall have at the time of the bid opening a valid plumbing contractor’s license, HVAC contractor’s license or electrical contractor’s license, respectively, as issued by the Idaho Division of Building Safety.


In determining if the above listed subcontractors are required on the Project, the Idaho Transportation Department will refer to the plans and specifications. If doubt exists prior to bid closing, potential bidders should contact the Idaho Transportation Department and the Design Professional who prepared the plans and specifications will be requested to make the determination. If plumbing, HVAC or electrical work are not shown on the plans and specifications, but are discovered by the bidder prior to the date of bid opening, then the bidder must request clarification from the Design Professional. Absent such clarification, Work will be considered incidental and naming of a subcontractor will not be required.

BID SECURITY AMOUNT AND FORM OF SECURITY: To be considered, bids must be accompanied by an acceptable bid security in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid, including additive alternates. The security may be in the form of a bond or a certified or cashier's check. A standard surety bid bond form meeting all the conditions of AIA Document A310 is acceptable and, if used, must include a certified and current copy of the power of attorney if the bond is executed by the attorney-in-fact on behalf of the surety. FORFEITURE: A successful bidder who fails to sign the Contract for the Work or furnish the required bonds within ten (10) calendar days following the receipt of notice of intent to award a Contract is subject to forfeiture in accordance with Section 54-1904E, Idaho Code. RETENTION OF SECURITY: Bid security shall be retained for no more than forty-five (45) calendar days after the opening of bids, so long as the bidder has not been notified of the acceptance of the bid.

BID WITHDRAWAL

PRIOR TO BID CLOSING: If a bid has been submitted, it may be withdrawn in person by a bidder’s authorized representative before the opening of the bids. A bidder’s representative will be required to show identification and sign on a bid summary sheet before it will be released. After bid closing, no bid may be withdrawn except in strict accordance with these Instructions or applicable law.

BID MODIFICATION PRIOR TO BID CLOSING: If a bid has been submitted, it may be modified by the submission of a written document contained in a separate sealed envelope marked “Bid Modification from [Name of Bidder] for ITD Project No: FM-22001 ITD POTLATCH CONTAINMENT FACILITY.

.” THE DOCUMENT MODIFYING THE BID MUST BE SIGNED IN INK BY AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF THE SUBMITTING BIDDER. THE IDAHO TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REQUIRE PRESENTATION OF EVIDENCE SATISFACTORY TO IT TO ESTABLISH THE AUTHORITY TO ACT ON BEHALF OF THE SUBMITTING BIDDER. NO OTHER FORM OF MODIFICATION (INCLUDING TELEPHONE, FACSIMILE OR ELECTRONIC MAIL) WILL BE ACCEPTED. AFTER BID CLOSING, NO BID MAY BE MODIFIED EXCEPT IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH THESE INSTRUCTIONS OR APPLICABLE LAW.


RELIEF FROM BIDS CONDITIONS FOR RELIEF: Relief from bids is subject to Sections 54-1904B through 54-1904E, Idaho Code. In the event a bidder discovers a mistake in its bid following the bid opening and wishes to withdraw its bid, the bidder shall establish to the satisfaction of the Owner, pursuant to Section 54-1904C, Idaho Code, that a clerical or mathematical mistake was made; the bidder gave the public entity (Owner) written notice within five (5) calendar days after the opening of the bid of the mistake, specifying in the notice in detail how the mistake occurred; and the mistake was material. DETERMINATION: If the Owner determines that the bidder has satisfied the requirements of Section 54-1904C, Idaho Code, to entitle it to relief from a bid because of a mistake, it shall prepare a report in writing to document the facts establishing the existence of each required element. The report shall be available for inspection as a public record and shall be filed with the public entity soliciting bids. A bidder claiming a mistake and satisfying all the required conditions of Section 54-1904C, Idaho Code, shall be entitled to relief from the bid and have any bid security returned by the Owner. Bidders not satisfying the conditions of Section 54-1904C, Idaho Code shall be subject to forfeiture in accordance with Section 54-1904B, Idaho Code. A bidder who claims a mistake or who forfeits its bid security shall be prohibited from participating in any re-bidding of that project on which the mistake was claimed or security forfeited and the Owner may award the Contract to the next lowest responsive and responsible bidder.

BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS REPRESENTATIONS UPON SUBMITTING A BID: By submitting its bid, a bidder represents and warrants the following:

1. The person signing the bid is authorized to bind the bidder; 2. It has all required licenses, permits or other authorizations necessary to submit its bid; 3. It has taken steps necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the Work and has

investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions which can affect the Work or its cost, including but not limited to: (i) conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials; (ii) the availability of labor, water, natural gas, electric power and roads; (iii) uncertainties of weather, river stages or similar physical conditions at the site; (iv) the conformation and conditions of the ground; and (v) the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the Work;

4. It has satisfied itself as to character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, including exploratory work done by the Owner as well as from the drawings and specifications provided as part of the bid package, and that any failure of the bidder to take such actions will not relieve the bidder from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully performing the Work;

5. It has received, read and reviewed the Contract, has submitted any questions in writing regarding the same and has received an answer to such questions;

6. Its bid is based upon the requirements of the Contract without exception; 7. It is in compliance with Title 72, Chapter 17, Idaho Code, regarding a drug-free workplace and

has included the required affidavit regarding the same; 8. Its bid is in compliance with employment of persons authorized to work in the United States;


9. It will retain bid security and hold and honor all base bid prices for forty-five (45) calendar days from the date of bid opening, and cannot be withdrawn after the bid opening;

10. Its bid prices shown for each item on the bid proposal form include all labor, material, equipment, overhead and compensation to complete all of the Work for that item; and

11. It has included in its bid amount Idaho sales and/or use taxes on all materials and equipment and all other taxes imposed by law.

BID AWARD AWARD METHOD: Public works construction contracts for the State of Idaho are awarded to the "lowest responsible and responsive bidder." The low bidder, for purposes of award, shall be the responsible and responsive bidder offering the low aggregate amount for the base bid item, plus any additive or deductive bid alternates selected by the Owner, and within funds available as determined by the Owner. Award is also subject to the requirements of Idaho Code, including without limitation: Title 67, Chapter 57; Title 67, Chapter 23; Title 54, Chapter 19; and Title 44, Chapter 10. It is the bidder's responsibility to conform to ALL applicable federal, state and local statutes or other applicable legal requirements. The information provided herein is intended to assist bidders in meeting applicable requirements but is not exhaustive and the Owner will not be responsible for any failure by any bidder to meet applicable requirements. DETERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY: The Owner reserves the right to make reasonable inquiry about or from the submitting bidder or from third parties to determine the responsibility of a submitting bidder. Such inquiry may include, but not be limited to, inquiry regarding experience and expertise related to the Project, manpower and other resources, financial stability, credit ratings, references, potential subcontractors and past performance. The unreasonable failure of a submitting bidder to promptly supply any requested information may result in a finding of non-responsibility. NOTICE OF EFFECTIVENESS: No Contract is effective until the authorized Owner’s official has signed the Contract and the Notice to Proceed has been issued. The bidder shall not provide any goods or render services until the Contract has been signed by the Idaho Transportation Department and the Contract has become effective. Furthermore, the Owner is in no way responsible for reimbursing the bidder for goods provided or services rendered prior to the signature of the authorized Idaho Transportation Department’s official and the arrival of the Notice to Proceed. INCURRING COSTS: The Owner is not liable for any cost incurred by bidders prior to the Notice to Proceed. PRIOR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE BIDS OR PROPOSALS: The Owner generally will not completely review or analyze bids that appear to fail to comply with the requirements of the bid documents, nor will the Owner generally investigate the references or qualifications of those who submit such bids. Therefore, any acknowledgment that the selection is complete shall not operate as a representation by the Owner that an unsuccessful bid was responsive, complete, sufficient or lawful in any respect. POST-AWARD SUBMITTALS: Upon receipt of a Notice of Intent to Award, the apparent low responsive and responsible bidder shall provide documentation required in such Notice. Such Notice of Intent to Award shall generally require the bidder to return to the Owner, within ten (10) days of receipt, a signed Contract, all required bonds, proof of insurance and documentation required by the Idaho State Tax Commission (report and affidavit).


OWNER’S RIGHT TO REJECT: Prior to execution of the Contract, the Owner or Design Professional shall provide written notice of any reasonable objection to any person or entity proposed by the bidder. Upon receipt of such notice, the bidder may withdraw its bid, without forfeiture, or propose a substitute and identify any change in any bid amount caused by such substitution. The Owner may accept or reject the substitution or the adjusted price. If the Owner rejects the substitution or the adjusted price, it will return the bidder’s bid guarantee. END OF INSTRUCTIONS

BID PROPOSAL BP-1 BOILERPLT-2009 dbb.doc (rev. 12/15/17) (ITD Project # FM-22001) (June 2019)

BID PROPOSAL TO: STATE OF IDAHO IDAHO TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT The Bidder, in compliance with your Invitation for Bids for the construction of ITD Project No: FM-22001; ITD POTLATCH CONTAINMENT FACILITY having examined the bidding and Contract Documents and the site of the proposed Work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the proposed Project, including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials and supplies and to provide the service and insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents, within the time set forth therein, and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the Work required under the Contract Documents. Bidder hereby agrees to commence Work under this Contract on a date to be specified in the written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to substantially complete the building foundation, tank installation, and complete and functioning plumbing system within specified consecutive calendar days (Section 011000) and separately substantially complete the building pre-engineered metal building canopy and overhead lighting within the specified consecutive calendar days (Section 011000) thereafter, as stipulated in the specifications. Bidder further agrees to pay as liquidated damages, the sum of $500.00 for each consecutive calendar day after the established substantial completion date or adjusted date as established by change order.

Bidder acknowledges receipt of Addenda No. ______________________. (List all Addenda)

BASE PROPOSAL: Bidder agrees to perform all of the base proposal Work described in the specifications and shown on the plans for the sum of:

___________________________________________________________ Dollars ($_______________) (Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern.)

Alternate No. 1: Pre-Engineered Metal Building Canopy and Overhead Lighting

Add the sum of _________________________________________________ Dollars ($____________) Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality in the bidding.

The bidder agrees that this bid shall be good for a period of forty-five (45) calendar days after the scheduled opening time for receiving bids. Upon receipt of written Notice of Intent to Award of this bid, Bidder will execute the formal Contract within ten (10) calendar days and deliver a Surety Bond or Bonds as required by paragraph “Performance and Payment Bonds” first page (ITB-1) of the Instructions to Bidders.

The bid security in the amount of five percent (5%) of the bid amount is to become the property of the Owner, in the event the Contract and bond are not executed within the time set forth, as liquidated damages for the delay and additional expense to the Owner caused thereby. The names and addresses of the entities who will perform the Work identified below, subject to approval of Owner and Architect, if Undersigned is awarded the Contract, are as follows:


Plumbing

(Name)

(Address)

Idaho Public Works Contractors License No.

Idaho Plumbing Contractors License No.

Electrical

(Name)

(Address)

Idaho Public Works Contractors License No.

Idaho Electrical Contractors License No. FAILURE TO NAME A PROPERLY LICENSED SUBCONTRACTOR IN EACH OF THE ABOVE CATEGORIES WILL RENDER THE BID UNRESPONSIVE AND VOID. Should the listing of subcontractors change due to selection of alternates or other similar circumstances, attach explanation. Bidder warrants that bid has been prepared and that any contract resulting from acceptance of this bid is subject to the Fixed Price Construction Contract.


The undersigned notifies that it is of this date duly licensed as an Idaho Public Works Contractor and further that it possesses Idaho Public Works Contractor's License No. __________________________, and is domiciled in the State of __________________________. Dated this ________ day of_____________,_______. (date) (month) (year) Respectfully submitted by:

(Contractor’s Name- Typed) SEAL

(Seal - if bid is by a corporation) (Street or PO Address)

(City, State and zip code)

(Authorized Signature)

(Title)

(Telephone Number)

(FAX Number)

(Email Address)

Responses that do not include bid security (bid bond or a certified or cashier’s check), Contractor’s Affidavit Concerning Alcohol and Drug-Free Workplace and a signed copy of the Bidder’s Acknowledgment Statement shall make your bid Non-Responsive.


Execute and Submit with Bid

CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT

CONCERNING ALCOHOL AND DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE STATE OF COUNTY OF Pursuant to the Section 72-1717, Idaho Code, I, the undersigned, being duly sworn, depose and certify that _____________________________________ is in compliance with the provisions of Section 72-1717, Idaho Code; that _______________________________________ provides a drug-free workplace program that complies with the provisions of Title 72, Chapter 17, Idaho Code, and will maintain such program throughout the life of a state construction contract; and that ___________________________________ shall subcontract Work only to subcontractors meeting the requirements of Section 72-1717(1)(a), Idaho Code.

Name of Contractor

Address

City and State By: (Signature) Subscribed and sworn to before me this ___________________ day of _________________, . NOTARY PUBLIC Residing at: Commission expires: FAILURE TO EXECUTE THIS AFFIDAVIT AND SUBMIT IT ALONG WITH YOUR BID SHALL MAKE YOUR BID NON-RESPONSIVE.


Execute and Submit with Bid

BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATEMENT

NOTE: THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS A SUMMARY OF VITAL CONTRACT PROVISIONS AND DOES NOT CHANGE THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS THAT WILL GOVERN THIS PROJECT. Idaho Transportation Department Project No. FM-22001; ITD POTLATCH CONTAINMENT FACILITY. By submitting a bid for this Project, the undersigned bidder agrees that, if awarded the Contract for construction, Contractor will conform to all conditions and requirements of the Contract, including but not limited to: • Contractor agrees to comply with conditions pertaining to Sections 44-1001 and 44-1002, Idaho

Code, requiring the employment of ninety-five percent (95%) bona fide Idaho residents and providing for a preference in the employment of bona fide Idaho residents and regarding the employment of persons not authorized to work in the United States.

• Contractor will substantially complete the Work within the time stated in the Contract Documents,

or as modified by Change Order(s). • If the Contractor fails to substantially complete the Project within the time stated in the Contract

Documents, or as modified by Change Order, the Contractor agrees that the Owner may deduct from the Contract amount liquidated damages in the amount per calendar day, indicated in the Contract Documents, times the number of calendar days until the Project is Substantially Complete, as defined in the Contract Documents and as determined by the Design Professional.

• The Contractor agrees that the amount allowed for overhead and profit on any Change Order is

limited to the amounts indicated in subparagraph 16.3.11 of the Fixed Price Construction Contract Between Owner and Contractor. 1. For total changes the amount allowed for overhead, profit, bonds and insurance for the

Contractor and all subcontractors of any tier combined shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of direct costs; or

2. The Contractor will determine the amount of overhead and profit to be apportioned between

the Contractor and its subcontractor of allowable amounts of overhead, profit, bonds and insurance.

• The Contractor agrees that Change Orders are governed by the Fixed Price Construction Contract

Between Owner and Contractor General Conditions of the Contract for Construction including as follows: 1. By the execution of a Change Order, the Contractor agrees and acknowledges that it has had

sufficient time and opportunity to examine the change in Work which is the subject of the Change Order and that it has undertaken all reasonable efforts to discover and disclose any concealed or unknown conditions which may, to any extent, affect the Contractor’s ability to perform in accordance with the Change Order. Aside from those matters specifically set forth


in the Change Order, the Owner shall not be obligated to make any adjustments to either the Contract Sum or Contract Time by reason of any conditions affecting the change in Work addressed by the Change Order that could have reasonably been discovered or disclosed by the Contractor’s examination.

2. Any Change Order fully executed by the Owner, Contractor and Design Professional, including but not limited to, a Change Order arising by reason of the parties’ mutual agreement or by mediation, shall constitute a final and full settlement of all matters relating to or affected by the change in the Work, including but not limited to, all direct and consequential costs associated with such change and any and all adjustments to the Contract Price and Contract Time. In the event a Change Order increases the Contract Price, the Contractor shall include the Work covered by such Change Order in the Application for Payment as if such Work was originally part of the Project and Contract Documents.

FAILURE TO EXECUTE THIS ACKNOWLEDGMENT SHALL MAKE YOUR BID NON-RESPONSIVE. I, _________________________________________________, being duly authorized to bind the (type or print name of individual) bidder, , does hereby certify that I have fully read (type or print name of company) and understand this document and that it highlights certain parts of the Contract that will be entered between the parties and that will govern this Project. Authorized Signature: _________________________________

Title: _______________________________________________

Date: _______________________________________________

END OF BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATEMENT

FIXED PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT FPCC - 1 BOILERPLT-2009 dbb.doc (rev. 12/15/17) (ITD Project # FM-22001) (June 2019)

IDAHO TRANSPORTATION DEPARTMENT FIXED PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

ITD PROJECT NO. FM-22001

ITD POTLATCH CONTAINMENT FACILITY DISTRICT #2

ITD Potlatch Facility

1557 State Highway 6 Potlatch, ID 83855


TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARTICLE 1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

2 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF THE CONTRACTOR

3 INTENT AND INTERPRETATION

4 OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTS

5 CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE

6 TIME FOR CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE

7 FIXED PRICE AND CONTRACT PAYMENTS

8 INFORMATION AND MATERIAL SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER

9 STOP WORK ORDER

10 DUTIES, OBLIGATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR

11 INDEMNITY

12 THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL

13 CLAIMS

14 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS

15 SUBCONTRACTORS

16 CHANGES IN THE WORK

17 DISCOVERING AND CORRECTING DEFECTIVE OR INCOMPLETE WORK

18 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR

19 OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE

20 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER

21 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE

22 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE

23 PROPERTY INSURANCE

24 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS

25 PROJECT RECORDS

26 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

27 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY

28 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

29 SEVERABILITY

30 MEDIATION

31 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES


EXHIBITS A PROJECT IDENTIFICATION, ADDENDA, CONTRACT AMOUNT, CONTRACT TIME, ACCEPTED

ALTERNATES, LIQUIDATED DAMAGESAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS. B ADDRESSES AND REPRESENTATIVES (INCLUDING LIMITATIONS) C LIST OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS D CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT CONCERNING TAXES E NAMED SUBCONTRACTORS F NOTICE TO PROCEED G REQUEST FOR TAX RELEASE H RELEASE OF CLAIMS


FIXED PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

THIS FIXED PRICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR (the “Contract”) is by and between the State of Idaho, Idaho Transportation Department (“ITD” or the "Owner") and ______________ (the "Contractor") and is for the construction of the project (the “Project”) identified as ITD Project No. ___________________], as more fully described in Exhibit A, and incorporated herein by reference. This Contract shall be effective on _______ (day) of ________ (month), 20__ (year), when executed by both parties. In consideration of the mutual promises, covenants, and agreements stated herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the sufficiency of which is hereby acknowledged, the Owner and the Contractor agree:

ARTICLE 1

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.1 The Contract Documents consist of this Contract, the drawings and specifications for the Project (the “Drawings and Specifications”) identified in Exhibit C and any Addenda thereto issued prior to execution of this Contract, written amendments signed by both the Owner and the Contractor, Change Orders signed by both the Owner and the Contractor, Construction Change Directives and any written orders by the Design Professional for minor changes in the Work (the “Contract Documents”). Documents not included or expressly contemplated in this Article 1 do not, and shall not, form any part of the Contract Documents. 1.2 The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations.

ARTICLE 2

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF THE CONTRACTOR In order to induce the Owner to execute this Contract and recognizing that the Owner is relying thereon, the Contractor, by executing this Contract, makes the following express representations to the Owner: 2.1 The Contractor is fully qualified to act as the Contractor for the Project and has, and shall maintain, any and all licenses, permits or other authorizations necessary to act as the Contractor for, and to construct, the Project. 2.2 The Contractor has become familiar with the Project site and the local conditions under which the Project is to be constructed and operated particularly in correlation to the requirements of the Contract. 2.3 The Contractor has received, reviewed, compared, studied and carefully examined all of the documents which make up the Contract Documents, including the Drawings and Specifications, and any Addenda, and has found them in all respects to be complete, accurate, adequate, consistent, coordinated and sufficient for construction. Such review, comparison, study and examination shall be a warranty that the contractor believes that the documents are complete and the Project is buildable as described except as reported. 2.4 The Contractor warrants that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 2.5 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Design Professional that all labor furnished on this Project shall be competent to perform the tasks undertaken; materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be new and of high quality unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents; that the Work will be complete, of high quality and free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted; and that the Work will strictly conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Any Work not strictly conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, shall be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse by Owner or its representatives, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. This warranty shall survive the completion of the Contract and final payment to the Contractor.


ARTICLE 3

INTENT AND INTERPRETATION With respect to the intent and interpretation of this Contract, the Owner and the Contractor agree as follows: 3.1 This Contract constitutes the entire and exclusive agreement between the parties with reference to the Project, and supersedes any and all prior discussions, communications, representations, understandings, negotiations or agreements. This Contract also supersedes any bid documents. 3.2 The intent of the Contract is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Project and anything that may be required, implied or inferred by the documents which make up this Contract, or any one or more of them, shall be provided by the Contractor for the Fixed Price Contract Amount. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. 3.3 Nothing contained in this Contract shall create, nor be interpreted to create, privity or any other relationship whatsoever between the Owner and any person or entity except the Contractor; provided, however, that the Design Professional is entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended or necessary to facilitate its duties. Any reference to the Owner, the Contractor or the Design Professional shall be deemed to include authorized representatives. 3.4 When a word, term or phrase is used in this Contract, it shall be interpreted or construed first as defined herein; second, if not defined, according to its generally accepted meaning in the construction industry; and third, if there is no generally accepted meaning in the construction industry, according to its common and customary usage. 3.5 The words "include," "includes," or "including," as used in this Contract, shall be deemed to be followed by the phrase "without limitation." 3.6 The specification herein of any act, failure, refusal, omission, event, occurrence or condition as constituting a material breach of this Contract shall not imply that any other, non-specified act, failure, refusal, omission, event, occurrence or condition shall be deemed not to constitute a material breach of this Contract. 3.7 The Contractor shall have a continuing duty to read, examine, review, compare and contrast each of the documents which make up this Contract, shop drawings and other submittals, and shall give timely written notice to the Owner and the Design Professional of any conflict, ambiguity, error or omission which the Contractor may find with respect to these documents before proceeding with the affected Work. 3.8 The express or implied approval by the Owner or the Design Professional of any shop drawings or other submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the continuing duties imposed hereby, nor shall any such approval be evidence of the Contractor's compliance with this Contract. The Owner has requested that the Design Professional prepare documents for the Project, including the Drawings and Specifications for the Project, which are accurate, adequate, consistent, coordinated and sufficient for construction. HOWEVER, THE OWNER MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER TO THE CONTRACTOR CONCERNING SUCH DOCUMENTS. The Contractor again hereby acknowledges and represents that it has received, reviewed and carefully examined such documents; has found them to be complete, accurate, adequate, consistent, coordinated and sufficient for construction; and that the Contractor has not, does not and will not rely upon any representations or warranties by the Owner concerning such documents, as no such representations or warranties have been or are hereby made. 3.9 In the event of any conflict among any of the documents which make up this Contract, the Design Professional shall interpret the documents, and the interpretation shall be binding on both the Owner and Contractor; provided, however, that this does not change the Owner’s right to make decisions regarding Claims in accordance with Article 13 and Article 14. If no interpretation is provided by the Design Professional, the most stringent requirement in the Contract Documents will apply.


ARTICLE 4

OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTS 4.1 Unless otherwise agreed by the Design Professional and its consultants, the party that prepared the drawings, specifications and other documents is the author of such with all copyright, common law, statutory and other reserved rights. The Contractor may retain one (1) record set of the Drawings and Specifications and other documents but shall not own or claim any copyright in them. The Drawings and Specifications and other documents, and any copies, are to be used solely for this Project, and not on any other project, or additions to this Project outside this Contract, without written consent of the Owner, the Design Professional and the Design Professional’s consultants; provided, however, that copies may be made of applicable portions as necessary for completion of the Work. Such copies shall include any copyright notice on the Drawings and Specifications and other documents. Submission to or use by a regulatory body related to this Project is an acceptable use.

ARTICLE 5

CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE The Contractor shall perform all of the Work required, implied or reasonably inferable from this Contract, including the following: 5.1 Construction of the Project. 5.2 The furnishing of any required surety bonds and insurance. 5.3 The provision or furnishing, and prompt payment therefore, of labor, supervision, services, materials, supplies, equipment, fixtures, appliances, facilities, tools, transportation, storage, power, fuel, heat, light, cooling or other utilities required for construction and all necessary permits, including any required elevator permits, required for the construction of the Project. Construction projects for the State of Idaho require a building permit issued by the Division of Building Safety. 5.4 The creation and submission of a detailed and comprehensive set of marked up blue or black-lined record drawings. Said record drawings shall be submitted to and approved by the Design Professional as a condition precedent to final payment to the Contractor.

ARTICLE 6

TIME FOR CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE 6.1 The Contractor shall commence the performance of this Contract in accordance with the "Notice to Proceed" (Exhibit F) issued by the Owner and shall diligently continue its performance to and until final completion of the Project. The Contractor shall accomplish Substantial Completion of the Project on or before the time indicated in Exhibit A. The period of time, including any adjustments made under this Contract, for the Contractor to reach Substantial Completion is the “Contract Time.” 6.2 The Contractor may be assessed by and be responsible to the Owner for the amount indicated in Exhibit A per day for each and every calendar day of unexcused delay in achieving Substantial Completion beyond the date set forth for Substantial Completion. Any sums owed hereunder by the Contractor shall be payable not as a penalty but as liquidated damages, representing an estimate of delay damages likely to be sustained by the Owner estimated at the time of this Contract. When the Owner reasonably believes that Substantial Completion will be inexcusably delayed, the Owner shall be entitled, but not required, to withhold from any amounts otherwise due the Contractor an amount then believed by the Owner to be adequate to recover liquidated damages applicable to such delays. If and when the Contractor overcomes the delay in achieving Substantial Completion, or any part thereof, for which the Owner has withheld payment, the Owner shall promptly release to the Contractor those funds withheld, but no longer applicable, as liquidated damages. The Owner’s right to liquidated damages is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an exclusive remedy for delay and the Owner shall retain all remedies at law or in equity for delay or other breach.


6.3 The term "Substantial Completion," as used herein, shall mean that point at which, as certified in writing by the Design Professional, or if there is no Design Professional, as certified by the Owner, the entire Project is at a level of completion in strict compliance with the Contract Documents, such that the Owner or its designee can enjoy beneficial use or occupancy and can use or operate it in all respects for its intended purpose. If, in the reasonable determination of the Owner, receipt of operation and maintenance manuals or completion of training is necessary for such beneficial use or occupancy, then there shall be no Substantial Completion until such manuals are provided or such training is completed. Partial use or occupancy of the Project shall not result in the Project being deemed substantially complete, or accepted as substantially complete, and such partial use or occupancy shall not be evidence of Substantial Completion. The Project shall not be deemed accepted until it is finally complete. 6.4 Any request by the Contractor for an extension of the Contract Time must be made in accordance with, and is subject to, Article 13 and Article 14 related to Claims. 6.5 The Owner shall have no liability of any kind to the Contractor if a schedule or other document submitted by the Contractor shows an intention to complete the Work prior to the scheduled completion date and for any reason other than Owner caused delay, the Contractor is not able to achieve such early completion.

ARTICLE 7

FIXED PRICE AND CONTRACT PAYMENTS 7.1 The Owner shall pay, and the Contractor shall accept, as full and complete payment for the Contractor's timely performance of its obligations hereunder, the Fixed Price Contract Amount indicated in Exhibit A. The Fixed Price Contract Amount shall not be modified except as provided in this Contract. ` 7.2 Prior to approval of the contract, the Contractor shall prepare and present to the Owner and the Design Professional the Contractor's Schedule of Values apportioning the Fixed Price Contract Amount among the different elements of the Project for purposes of periodic and final payment. The Contractor shall not imbalance it’s Schedule of Values nor artificially inflate any element thereof. The violation of this provision by the Contractor shall constitute a material breach of this Contract. The Contractor's Schedule of Values will be utilized for the Contractor's requests for payment but shall only be so utilized after it has been approved in writing by the Design Professional. 7.3 The Owner shall pay the Fixed Price Contract Amount to the Contractor in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Article. The Contractor shall submit a Contractor’s Request for Payment, on or before the day of each month indicated in Exhibit A or otherwise agreed to, after commencement of performance, but no more frequently than once monthly. Said payment request shall include whatever supporting information as may be required by the Design Professional, the Owner or both. Therein, the Contractor may request payment for one hundred percent (100%) of the Work satisfactorily completed to the date of the Contractor’s Request for Payment, less five percent (5%) retainage, based on the Fixed Price Contract Amount allocated on the Schedule of Values. The Contractor’s Request for Payment may include only: properly provided labor, materials or equipment properly incorporated into the Project, and time and materials or equipment necessary for the Project or that will be incorporated into the Project and are properly stored at the Project site (or elsewhere if off-site storage is approved in writing by the Owner). The Contractor’s Request for Payment must exclude the total amount of previous payments received from the Owner. Any payment on account of stored materials or equipment will be subject to the Contractor providing written proof that the Owner has title to such materials or equipment and that they are fully insured against loss or damage. Each such Contractor’s Request for Payment shall be signed by the Contractor and its submission shall constitute the Contractor's affirmative representation that the quantity of Work has reached the level for which payment is requested; that the Work has been properly installed or performed in strict compliance with the Contract; that all Work for which the Owner has previously paid is free and clear of any lien, claim or other encumbrance of any person whatsoever; and that the Contractor knows of no reason why payment should not be made as requested. As a condition precedent to payment, the Contractor shall, if required by the Owner, furnish to the Owner properly executed waivers or releases, in a form acceptable to the Owner, from all subcontractors, materialmen, suppliers or others having any claims or alleged claims, wherein said subcontractors, materialmen, suppliers or others shall acknowledge receipt of all sums due pursuant to all prior Contractor’s Requests for Payment, and waive and relinquish any rights or other claims relating to the Project or Project site. The submission by the Contractor of the Contractor’s Request for Payment also constitutes the Contractor’s


affirmative representation that, upon payment of the Contractor’s Request for Payment submitted, title to all Work included in such payment shall be vested in the Owner. Thereafter, the Design Professional shall review the Contractor’s Request for Payment and may also review the Work at the Project site or elsewhere to determine whether the quantity and quality of the Work are as represented in the Contractor’s Request for Payment and as required by this Contract. The Design Professional shall approve in writing the amount which, in the opinion of the Design Professional, is properly owing to the Contractor and such approval is required before the Owner shall have any payment obligation. The Design Professional may withhold such approval, in whole or in part, as necessary to protect the Owner if it reasonably believes that the quantity or quality of the Work is not as represented in the Contractor’s Request for Payment or is not in strict conformance to the Contract Documents.

7.4 The Owner shall make payment to the Contractor no more than twenty-one (21) days following receipt by the Owner of the Design Professional's written approval of each Contractor’s Request for Payment. The amount of each such payment shall be the amount approved for payment by the Design Professional less such amounts, if any, otherwise owing by the Contractor to the Owner or which the Owner shall have the right to withhold as authorized by this Contract. The Design Professional's approval of the Contractor's Request for Payment shall not preclude the Owner from the exercise of any of its rights it may have in this Contract, at law or in equity, as set forth in Paragraph 7.8 hereinafter. 7.5 Off-site storage will not be approved at locations more than thirty (30) miles from the Project site or outside the State of Idaho and any payment for any off-site storage is subject to the following:

.1 The Contractor must provide at least thirty (30) days’ advance written notice of its request to store off-site. Such notice must include a description of the type, quantities, locations and values of materials involved for the next billing cycle. All invoices must indicate the type, quantities and value of materials or equipment for which payment is requested;

.2 All materials stored off-site must be segregated and clearly marked with the ITD Project number and as being the “Property of the State of Idaho;”

.3 The Design Professional and/or the Owner’s Field Representative must have unrestricted access to the stored materials during all business hours and may physically inventory all invoiced materials and equipment and may physically inspect the storage conditions;

.4 The Contractor must provide written Consent of Surety to off-site storage of materials and equipment and to payment for such materials and equipment prior to incorporation in the Work. Consent must be from the Surety. Consent of local broker or agent is not acceptable;

.5 The Contractor must maintain and must provide to the Design Professional, upon request, a current log of stored materials and equipment, which reflects when materials and equipment are used or added; and

.6 The Contractor must obtain and maintain all risk property insurance at replacement cost, with the State of Idaho listed as loss payee on all materials and equipment stored off-site and in transit.

7.6 When payment is received from the Owner, the Contractor shall immediately pay all subcontractors, materialmen, laborer and suppliers the amounts they are due for the Work covered by such payment. The Contractor shall not withhold from a subcontractor or supplier more than the percentage withheld from a payment certificate for the subcontractor’s or supplier’s portion of the Work. In the event the Owner becomes informed that the Contractor has not paid a subcontractor, materialmen, laborer or supplier as provided herein, the Owner shall have the right, but not the duty, to issue future checks and payment to the Contractor of amounts otherwise due hereunder naming the Contractor and any such subcontractor, materialmen, laborer or supplier as joint payees. Such joint check procedure, if employed by the Owner, shall create no rights in favor of any person or entity beyond the right of the named payees to payment of the check and shall not be deemed to commit the Owner to repeat the procedure in the future.


7.7 Payment to the Contractor, utilization of the Project for any purpose by the Owner, or any other act or omission by the Owner shall not be interpreted or construed as an acceptance of any Work of the Contractor not strictly in compliance with this Contract. 7.8 The Owner shall have and be entitled to the right to refuse to make any payment, including by reducing payment under any Contractor’s Request for Payment, and, if necessary, may demand the return of a portion or all of an amount previously paid to the Contractor for reasons that include the following:

.1 The quality of the Contractor's work, in whole or part, is not in strict accordance with the requirements of this Contract or identified defective work, including punch list work, is not remedied as required by the Contract Documents;

.2 The quantity of the Contractor's work, in whole or in part, is not as represented in the Contractor's Request for Payment or otherwise;

.3 The Contractor's rate of progress is such that, in the Owner's opinion, Substantial Completion or final completion, or both, may be inexcusably delayed or that the Owner will incur additional costs or expense related to repeated Substantial Completion or final completion inspections through no fault of the Owner;

.4 The Owner reasonably believes that the Contractor has failed to use Contract funds, previously paid the Contractor by the Owner, to pay Contractor's project-related obligations, including subcontractors, laborers and material and equipment suppliers;

.5 There are claims made or it seems reasonably likely that claims will be made, against the Owner;

.6 The Contractor has caused a loss or damage to the Owner, the Design Professional or another contractor;

.7 The Owner reasonably believes that the Project cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Fixed Price Contract Amount or the Owner reasonably believes that the Project cannot be completed within the Contract Time and that the unpaid balance of the Fixed Price Contract Amount would be inadequate to cover the cost of actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;

.8 The Contractor fails or refuses to perform any of its obligations to the Owner; or

.9 The Contractor fails to pay taxes as required by Title 63, Chapter 15, Idaho Code.

In the event that the Owner makes written demand upon the Contractor for amounts previously paid by the Owner as contemplated in Paragraph 7.8, the Contractor shall promptly comply with such demand. 7.9 If the Owner, without cause, fails to pay the Contractor any amounts due and payable thirty (30) days after those amounts are due pursuant to Paragraph 7.4, the Contractor shall have the right to cease the Work until receipt of proper payment. Contractor must first provide written notice to the Owner of the Contractor’s intent to cease the Work ten (10) days prior to stopping the Work under this Paragraph. If any amounts remain unpaid after fifty-one (51) days after the Design Professional approves the Contractor’s Request for Payment under Paragraph 7.4, interest at the rate of four percent (4%) per annum shall accrue on those unpaid amounts. 7.10 When Contractor considers Substantial Completion has been achieved, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Design Professional in writing and shall furnish to the Design Professional a listing of those matters yet to be finished. The Design Professional will thereupon conduct an inspection to confirm that the Work is, in fact, substantially complete. Upon its confirmation that the Contractor's work is substantially complete, the Design Professional will so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing and will therein set forth the date of Substantial Completion. The Owner and the Contractor must accept the date of Substantial Completion in writing. Guarantees and warranties required by this Contract shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion. At the Contractor’s Request for Payment following Substantial Completion, the Owner shall pay the Contractor an amount sufficient to increase total payments to the Contractor to ninety-five percent (95%) of the Fixed Price Contract Amount, less any liquidated damages, less the reasonable costs as determined by the Design Professional for completing all incomplete work, correcting and bringing into conformance all defective and nonconforming work, and handling any


outstanding or potential claims. If the Design Professional determines that the Contractor has made or is making satisfactory progress on any uncompleted portions of the Work, the Owner may, at its discretion, release a portion of the retainage to the Contractor prior to the actual final completion of the conditions set forth in Paragraph 7.13. It is the intent of the parties that the Project will be accepted only in total (at Substantial Completion and final completion) and not in phases unless provided for in Exhibit A. Any acceptance other than in total shall require written agreement of Owner and Design Professional. 7.11 When Contractor considers the Project is at final completion, it shall notify the Owner and the Design Professional thereof in writing. Thereupon, the Design Professional will perform a final inspection of the Project. If the Design Professional confirms that the Project is complete in full accordance with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor has performed all of its obligations to the Owner, the Design Professional will furnish a final approval for payment to the Owner certifying to the Owner that the Project is complete and the Contractor is entitled to the remainder of the unpaid Fixed Price Contract Amount, less any amount withheld pursuant to this Contract. 7.12 If the Contractor fails to achieve final completion within a reasonable number of days as established by the Design Professional from the date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor may be assessed and be responsible to the Owner for fifty percent (50%) of the daily amount of liquidated damages as established pursuant to Paragraph 6.2 and Exhibit A, per day for each and every calendar day of unexcused delay in achieving final completion beyond the date established for final completion of the Work. Any sums due and payable hereunder by the Contractor shall be payable not as a penalty but as liquidated damages representing an estimate of delay damages likely to be sustained by the Owner, estimated at or before the time of executing this Contract. When the Owner reasonably believes that final completion will be inexcusably delayed, the Owner may withhold from any amounts otherwise due the Contractor an amount then believed by the Owner to be adequate to recover liquidated damages applicable to such delays. If and when the Contractor overcomes the delay in achieving final completion, or any part thereof, for which the Owner has withheld payment, the Owner shall promptly release to the Contractor those funds withheld, but no longer applicable, as liquidated damages. The Owner’s right to liquidated damages is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an exclusive remedy for delay and the Owner shall retain all remedies at law or in equity for delay or other breach. 7.13 As a condition precedent to final payment, the Contractor must furnish the Owner, in the form and manner required by Owner, and with a copy to the Design Professional of the following:

.1 An affidavit that all of the Contractor's obligations to subcontractors, laborers, equipment or material suppliers or other third parties in connection with the Project have been paid or otherwise satisfied;

.2 A release by the Contractor of all Claims it has or might have against the Owner or the Owner's property (ITD’s form, Exhibit H);

.3 Contractor’s Affidavit of Debts and Claims (AIA Document G706);

.4 Consent of Surety to final payment (AIA Document G707);

.5 Confirmation of all required training, product warranties, operating manuals, instruction manuals and other record documents, drawings and things customarily required of the Contractor; and

.6 A Public Works Contract Tax Release issued by the Idaho Tax Commission (See “Request for Tax Release” form, Exhibit G, to be submitted by Contractor to the Idaho Tax Commission).

7.14 The Owner shall, subject to its rights set forth in this Contract, make final payment of all sums due the Contractor within thirty (30) days of the Design Professional's execution of a final approval for payment and receipt of documentation required by Paragraph 7.13, whichever is received later.

ARTICLE 8

INFORMATION AND MATERIAL SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER 8.1 The Contracting Officer of ITD or his designee shall be the sole representative of the State of Idaho. The Design Professional shall have authority to bind Owner only as specifically set forth in this Contract.


8.2 The Owner will assign a Project Manager and a Field Representative to represent the Owner, identified in Exhibit B. The Owner’s Field Representative's duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority are in accordance with ITD’s policies and procedures. 8.3 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, prior to the execution of this Contract, any and all written and tangible material in its possession concerning conditions below ground at the site of the Project. Such written and tangible material is furnished to the Contractor only in order to make complete disclosure of such material as being in the possession of the Owner and for no other purpose. By furnishing such material, the Owner does not represent, warrant or guarantee its accuracy, either in whole in part, implicitly or explicitly. 8.4 The Owner will secure and pay for all required easements, the plan check fee required by the Division of Building Safety, conditional use permits and any other permits and fees specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be secured and paid for by the Owner. 8.5 The Owner will provide the Contractor one (1) copy of this complete Contract and the number of sets of Drawings and Project Manuals (including Specifications) as indicated in Exhibit A. The Contractor may purchase additional copies, at its expense, from the Design Professional.

ARTICLE 9

STOP WORK ORDER

9.1 In the event the Contractor fails or refuses to perform the Work as required or fails or refuses to correct nonconforming Work, the Owner may instruct the Contractor to stop Work in whole or in part. Upon receipt of such instruction, the Contractor shall immediately stop as instructed by the Owner and shall not proceed further until the cause for the Owner's instructions has been corrected, no longer exists or the Owner instructs that the Work may resume. In the event the Owner issues such instructions to stop, and in the further event that the Contractor fails and refuses within seven (7) days of receipt of same to provide adequate assurance to the Owner that the cause of such instructions will be eliminated or corrected, then the Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, to carry out the Work with its own forces or with the forces of another contractor, and the Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for the costs of performing such Work by the Owner. Without limiting what else might constitute nonconforming Work, the existence of a gross safety violation or other situation or condition that creates, or could imminently create, a threat of serious harm to persons or property, shall constitute nonconforming Work and any order to stop the Work issued for such reason shall not be considered an interference with the Contractor’s performance of the Work or its means and methods. The rights set forth herein are in addition to, and without prejudice to, any other rights or remedies the Owner may have against the Contractor. 9.2 Any order to stop the Work issued pursuant to Paragraph 9.1 shall not be used to justify any Claim by the Contractor for additional time or money.

ARTICLE 10 DUTIES, OBLIGATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR

In addition to any and all other duties, obligations and responsibilities of the Contractor set forth in this Contract, the Contractor shall have and perform the following duties, obligations and responsibilities to the Owner: 10.1 The Contractor's continuing duties set forth in Paragraph 3.7 are by reference hereby incorporated in this Paragraph 10.1. The Contractor shall not perform Work without adequate plans and specifications or, as appropriate, approved shop drawings or other submittals. If the Contractor performs Work knowing or believing it involves an error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract without first providing written notice to the Design Professional and Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such Work and shall pay the cost of correcting same. 10.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing Work. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Design Professional, the Owner and the Owner's Field Representative immediately. Such examination, review and comparison shall be a warranty that the Contract Documents are complete and the Project is buildable as


described except as reported. Reported errors, inconsistencies or omissions will constitute a request for an interpretation by the Design Professional and may constitute a claim pursuant to Article 13 hereof where appropriate. 10.3 The Contractor shall ensure that all Work shall strictly conform to the requirements of this Contract. 10.4 The Work shall be strictly supervised, the Contractor bearing full responsibility for any and all acts or omissions of those engaged in the Work on behalf of the Contractor. 10.5 All labor furnished on this Project shall be competent to perform the tasks undertaken; materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be new and of high quality unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents; the Work will be complete, of high quality and free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted; and the Work will strictly conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Any Work not strictly conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, shall be considered defective. 10.6 Except as provided in Paragraph 8.4, the Contractor shall secure or provide and pay for all licenses, permits required by the Idaho Division of Building Safety, governmental approvals and inspections, connections for outside services for the use of municipal or private property for storage of materials, parking, utility services, temporary obstructions, enclosures or opening and patching of streets, and for all other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Project. 10.7 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 10.8 The Contractor shall employ and maintain at the Project site only competent supervisory personnel. Key supervisory personnel assigned by the Contractor to this Project are as listed in Exhibit B. 10.9 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants, as needed, to oversee execution of the Work. The superintendent shall be in attendance at the Project site during the progress of the Work. The superintendent and any project manager, if the Contractor utilizes a project manager, shall be reviewed and must be approved by the Design Professional and Owner, and neither shall be changed except with the consent of the Design Professional and Owner, unless the superintendent and/or project manager cease to be employed by the Contractor. Under this circumstance, any new superintendent or new project manager must be satisfactory to the Design Professional and Owner. Such approval shall not be unreasonably withheld. The superintendent and any project manager shall represent the Contractor and all communications given to the superintendent or project manager are deemed given to the Contractor. 10.10 So long as the individuals named above remain actively employed or retained by the Contractor, they shall perform the functions indicated next to their names unless the Owner agrees to the contrary in writing. In the event one or more individuals not listed in Paragraph 10.9 subsequently assumes one or more of those functions listed in Paragraph 10.9, the Contractor shall be bound by the provisions of this paragraph as though such individuals had been listed in Paragraph 10.9. 10.11 The Contractor shall provide to the Owner and the Design Professional a milestone schedule for completing the Work within the Contract Time. Such schedule shall be in a form specified in Division 1 of the Specifications and be acceptable to the Owner and to the Design Professional. The schedule must be submitted to and accepted by the Design Professional prior to the first request for payment unless required earlier by Division 1 of the Specifications. The Contractor's milestone schedule must be updated as required by the Design Professional and/or the Owner to reflect conditions encountered and shall apply to the total Project. The Contractor's revisions to the schedule shall not constitute a waiver of the requirement to complete the Project in the time allowed by the Contract, unless additional time for performance has been allowed pursuant to a Change Order. Any changes in milestone begin or end dates must be furnished to the Owner and the Design Professional. Strict compliance with the requirements of this Paragraph shall be a condition precedent to the payment to the Contractor and failure by the Contractor to strictly comply with said requirements shall constitute a material breach of this Contract. 10.12 Unless otherwise provided in the Construction Documents, on all projects where the Fixed Price Contract Amount is over $1,000,000, the Contractor shall schedule and perform the Work in accordance with a Critical Path


Method (“CPM”) to indicate the rate of progress and practical order of the Project. The purpose of this scheduling requirement is to assure adequate planning, coordination and execution of the Work. The schedule shall indicate the dates for starting and completing major work activities, project events, major equipment, material and equipment submittals and delivery of major items. Project activities having critical time restraints on action, required by the Owner, shall be shown as scheduled milestones. The Contractor's schedule shall demonstrate the order, interdependence and sequence of activities. Critical paths shall be highlighted or distinguished. The schedule shall include all the dates specified in the Contract for Substantial Completion and final completion of the Work. The time limit set forth in the Contract for Substantial Completion and final completion must govern; the schedule must be adjusted to meet these dates. Schedule float shall belong to the Project. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Design Professional a CPM schedule within three (3) weeks after award of the Contract and maintain such schedule on a current basis in accordance with the Contract Documents. 10.13 Once a month, or at intervals as required by the Design Professional, the Contractor shall advise the Owner and the Design Professional of the status of the Work (in duplicate) on the current milestone schedule. If any project milestone dates are not met on schedule, the Contractor shall immediately advise the Owner and Design Professional in writing of the proposed action to bring the Work on schedule. The Contractor shall also submit a detailed short term schedule, as required by Division 1 of the Specifications, each month. This short term schedule shall include a description of current and anticipated problem areas, delaying factors and their impact, and explanation of corrective action taken or proposed. If the Work is behind schedule, the Contractor shall indicate what measures it will take to put the Work back on schedule. 10.14 If the Work is not progressing through no fault of the Owner or the Design Professional, as shown on the milestone schedule, as determined by the Design Professional, and the Owner and the Design Professional do not believe the Contractor's proposed action to bring the Work on schedule is adequate, then the Contractor shall be deemed in default under this Contract and the progress of the Work shall be deemed unsatisfactory. In such event, the Owner, at its discretion, may require the Contractor to work such additional time over regular hours, including Saturdays, Sundays and holidays, without additional cost to the Owner to bring the Work on schedule. 10.15 The Contractor shall keep an updated copy of the Drawings and Project Manual (including Specifications) and Addenda at the site. Additionally, the Contractor shall keep a current submittal schedule and a copy of approved shop drawings and other submittals. All of these items shall be available to the Owner and the Design Professional at all regular business hours. Upon final completion of the Work, all of these items must be updated by the Contractor and provided to the Design Professional and shall become the property of the Owner. 10.16 The Contractor shall carefully review and inspect for compliance with the Contract Documents, the shop drawings and other submittals (including product data and samples) required by the Contract Documents and shall submit to the Design Professional only submittals approved in accordance with this section. Such review and submittal shall be done promptly and in a sequence that will not delay its Work under this Contract or the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Shop drawings and other submittals from the Contractor do not constitute a part of the Contract. The Contractor shall not do any work requiring shop drawings or other submittals unless the Design Professional has verified compliance in writing. All Work requiring verified shop drawings or other submittals shall be done in strict compliance with such approved documents. However, verification of compliance by the Design Professional shall not be evidence that Work installed pursuant thereto conforms with the requirements of this Contract. The Design Professional shall have no duty to review submittals that are not Contractor approved, partial submittals or incomplete submittals. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log which shall include, at a minimum, the date of each submittal, the date of any re-submittal, the date of any approval or rejection and the reason for any rejection. 10.17 The Contractor shall maintain the Project site in a reasonably clean condition during performance of the Work. Upon final completion, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean the Project site of all debris, trash and excess materials or equipment. 10.18 At all times relevant to this Contract, the Owner and the Design Professional shall have a right to enter the Project site and the Contractor shall allow the Owner and/or the Design Professional to review or inspect the work without formality or other procedure. 10.19 The presence or duties of the Design Professional’s or the Owner's personnel or representatives at the construction site, does not make any of them responsible for those duties that belong to the Contractor or other


entities and does not relieve the Contractor or any other entities of their obligations, duties and responsibilities, including any obligation or requirement to have or to implement any health or safety plans or precautions. Except as provided in Paragraph 10.9, Design Professional's and Owner's personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any Contractor or other entities or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions and have no duty for inspecting, noting, observing, correcting or reporting on health or safety deficiencies of the Contractor or other entities or any other persons at the site except their own personnel. The presence of Design Professional’s or Owner's personnel at a construction site is for the purpose of providing to Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents and that the integrity of the design concept as reflected in the Contract Documents has been implemented and preserved by the Contractor. For this Contract only, construction sites include places of manufacture for materials incorporated into the construction Work and Contractor includes manufacturers of materials incorporated into the construction Work.

ARTICLE 11 INDEMNITY

11.1 The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Design Professional, the Idaho Transportation Department and their employees, officers and agents harmless from any and all claims, liabilities, damages, losses, costs and expenses of every type whatsoever, including attorney fees and expenses, arising out of or resulting from the Contractor's work, acts or omissions under or related to the Contract Documents, to the extent caused by the Contractor, or anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable, regardless of whether such liability, claim, damage, loss, cost or expense is caused in part by the Owner. 11.2 The limits of any insurance of the Contractor shall not be, and shall not be deemed to be, a limitation of the Contractor’s defense and indemnity obligations contained in this Article. 11.3 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Article by an employee of the Contractor, a subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Article shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a subcontractor under workers' or workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 12 THE DESIGN PROFESSIONAL

The Design Professional for this Project is identified in Exhibit B, incorporated herein by reference, along with any authorized representatives and any limitations of responsibility. For the purpose of this Contract, the ”Design Professional” means the properly licensed architect, properly registered professional engineer or other professional licensed in the State of Idaho who prepared the Drawings and Specifications for this Project. If the employment of the Design Professional is terminated, the Owner may retain a replacement professional and the role of the replacement professional shall be the same as the role of the Design Professional. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner in writing, the Design Professional will perform those duties and discharge those responsibilities allocated to the Design Professional in this Contract. The duties, obligations and responsibilities of the Design Professional shall be for contract administration and include the following: 12.1 Unless otherwise directed by the Owner in writing, the Design Professional shall not act as the Owner's agent. 12.2 Unless otherwise directed by the Owner in writing, the Owner and the Contractor shall communicate with each other through the Design Professional. 12.3 When requested by the Owner or Contractor in writing, the Design Professional shall within seven (7) days render written interpretations necessary for the proper execution or progress of the Work or shall provide a written explanation as to why more time is needed and provide a date by which it will be provided. 12.4 The Design Professional shall draft proposed change authorization(s).


12.5 The Design Professional shall review and verify compliance or respond otherwise as necessary concerning shop drawings or other submittals received from the Contractor. 12.6 The Design Professional shall be authorized to refuse to accept Work that is defective or otherwise fails to comply with the requirements of this Contract. If the Design Professional deems it appropriate, the Design Professional may, with the Owner’s consent, require extra inspections or testing of the Work for compliance with the requirements of this Contract. 12.7 The Design Professional shall review the Contractor's Request for Payment and shall verify in writing those amounts which, in the opinion of the Design Professional, are properly owing to the Contractor as provided in this Contract. 12.8 The Design Professional shall, upon written request from the Contractor, perform Substantial Completion and final completion inspections contemplated by Article 6. 12.9 The Design Professional may require the Contractor to make changes which do not involve a change in the Fixed Price Contract Amount or in the Contract Time consistent with the intent of this Contract. Such changes shall be given to the Contractor in writing under signature of the Design Professional, with a copy to the Owner, and may be in the form of a supplemental instruction. 12.10 The Design Professional shall review and evaluate Claims and take other actions related to Claims in accordance with Articles 13 and 14. 12.11 The duties, obligations and responsibilities of the Contractor under this Contract shall in no manner whatsoever be changed, altered, discharged, released or satisfied by any duty, obligation or responsibility of the Design Professional. The Contractor is not a third-party beneficiary of any Contract by and between the Owner and the Design Professional. It is expressly acknowledged and agreed that the duties of the Contractor to the Owner are independent of, and are not diminished by, any duties of the Design Professional to the Owner.

ARTICLE 13

CLAIMS 13.1 For purposes of this Contract, a “Claim” means a demand by the Contractor to the Owner, or by the Owner to the Contractor, for a change in the Fixed Price Contract Amount, an extension of the Contract Time, an adjustment to or interpretation of the Contract terms, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract, which demand the Contractor or Owner asserts is required or allowed under the Contract Documents and which the Contractor and the Owner have previously discussed and failed to agree upon. 13.2 For the Claim to be considered, it must meet the following requirements:

.1 The Claim must be in writing;

.2 The Claim by the Contractor must be signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor, and the Claim by the Owner must be signed by an authorized representative of the Owner;

.3 The Claim by the Contractor must be provided to the Owner and to the Design Professional and the Claim by the Owner must be provided to the Contractor and to the Design Professional;

.4 The Claim must be made no later than ten (10) days after the event or first appearance of the circumstance giving rise to the Claim;

.5 The Claim must describe in detail all known facts and circumstances that the Contractor or Owner asserts support the Claim;

.6 The Claim must refer to the provision(s) of the Contract Documents that the Contractor or Owner asserts support the Claim;

.7 The Contractor or Owner must provide all documentation or other information to substantiate the Claim; and


.8 The Contractor or Owner must continue its performance under this Contract pending the resolution of any Claim; provided, however, that the Contractor shall not perform any additional or changed work not otherwise authorized in accordance with the Contract Documents.

13.3 The failure by the Contractor to meet any of the requirements of Paragraph 13.2 shall constitute a complete waiver by the Contractor of any rights arising from or related to the Claim. Similarly, the failure by the Owner to meet any of the requirements of Paragraph 13.2 shall constitute a complete waiver by the Owner of any rights arising from or related to the Claim. 13.4 If the Claim is made based on concealed or unknown site conditions, the following shall apply in addition to all other provisions applicable to the Claim:

.1 The condition must have been previously concealed and unknown or of a type not ordinarily encountered in the general geographic location of the Project and must not have been reasonably susceptible to discovery; and

.2 The Contractor shall notify the Design Professional and the Owner of the condition and shall not disturb the condition until the Design Professional and Owner have observed it or have waived in writing the right to observe it.

13.5 If the Claim by the Contractor is for an increase in the Fixed Price Contract Amount, the following shall apply in addition to all other provisions applicable to the Claim:

.1 Any increase in the Fixed Price Contract Amount shall be strictly limited to the direct costs incurred by the Contractor and shall not include any other costs, indirect or other, including any costs for or related to lost productivity, profit, home office overhead and any other overhead, legal fees, claim preparation, any matter previously resolved by a change order, equipment costs, costs related to the services of a project manager unless the project manager was required full time by the Owner or the Contract Documents, any costs associated with the failure to complete the Work early or in advance of the date required by the Contract Documents, it being specifically agreed to by the parties that there is no intention to have the Eichleay or other similar formula applicable to this Contract nor shall this Contract be deemed to be subject to any such formula; and

.2 The Owner shall have no liability for, and the Fixed Price Contract Amount shall not be increased related to, any claims of third parties, including subcontractors, unless and until the liability of the Contractor for such has been established in a court of competent jurisdiction and any such liability of the Owner shall be limited in the same manner as described in subparagraph 13.5.1.

13.6 If the Claim by the Owner is for a change in the Fixed Price Contract Amount, all other applicable provisions to the Claim apply.

13.7 If the Claim by the Contractor is for an extension of the Contract Time, the following shall apply in addition to all other provisions applicable to the Claim:

.1 The Contractor has been delayed in its performance by an act or omission of the Owner and through no fault of the Contractor;

.2 The Contractor has been delayed in its performance by unusually severe weather that could not reasonably have been anticipated or by another event not within its reasonable control;

.3 At the time it occurs or during its occurrence, the delay will preclude completion of the Project in the time required by the Contract Documents; and

.4 Any extension of the Contract Time shall be the Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for any delay except a delay caused by the active interference of the Owner with the Contractor’s performance which active interference continues after written notice to the Owner. The Owner’s exercise of any of its rights or remedies under this Contract, including ordering changes in the Work, directing suspension, rescheduling or correction of the Work, do not constitute active interference.


13.8 If a Claim is made based on an error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract that was reasonably susceptible to discovery by the Contractor and was not reported in accordance with Paragraph 2.3, that Claim shall be denied.

ARTICLE 14 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS

14.1 All Claims made in accordance with Article 13 shall be reviewed and evaluated by the Design Professional. If the Claim is not made in strict accordance with Article 13, it shall be rejected as waived. Any failure by the Design Professional to reject the Claim for failure to meet the requirements of Article 13 is not binding on the Owner and the Owner may reject the Claim for such failure. 14.2 No later than seven (7) days from receipt of the Claim by the Design Professional, it shall:

.1 Make a written request to the Contractor or Owner for more data to support the Claim;

.2 Attempt to facilitate resolution of the Claim through informal negotiations; or

.3 If the Claim is by the Contractor, make a written recommendation to the Owner, with a copy to the Contractor, that the Owner reject or approve all or part of the Claim and state the reasons for the Design Professional’s recommendation. If the Claim is by the Owner, make a written recommendation to the Contractor, with a copy to the Owner, that the Contractor reject or approve all or part of the Claim and state the reasons for the Design Professional’s recommendation.

14.3 If the Design Professional requests more data from the Contractor or the Owner under subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor or Owner shall respond no later than seven (7) days from receipt of such request, and provide additional data, provide a date certain by which additional data will be provided, or state that it will not provide additional data. Upon receipt of data, if any, in accordance with this section, the Design Professional will complete the evaluation of the Claim. Failure to respond at all or failure to provide data by the date specified in the response to the request shall result in the Claim being evaluated based on the information in the Design Professional’s possession. 14.4 In evaluating the Claim, the Design Professional may consult with the Contractor, the Owner or other persons with knowledge or expertise that may assist the Design Professional in its evaluation. 14.5 No later than fourteen (14) days after receipt by the Owner of the Design Professional’s recommendation regarding the Contractor’s Claim, the Owner shall, in writing, notify the Contractor and the Design Professional of its decision regarding the Claim. No later than fourteen (14) days after receipt by the Contractor of the Design Professional’s recommendation regarding the Owner’s Claim, the Contractor shall, in writing, notify the Owner and the Design Professional of its decision regarding the Claim. 14.6 The Owner’s decision regarding the Contractor’s Claim is binding on the Owner and the Contractor but is subject to mediation in accordance with this Contract, and the Contractor’s decision regarding the Owner’s Claim is binding on the Owner and the Contractor but is subject to mediation in accordance with this Contract.

ARTICLE 15

SUBCONTRACTORS

15.1 A document in the form of Exhibit E shall be completed and submitted upon execution of this Contract and those subcontractors named therein shall match those subcontractors named in the Contractor’s bid unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Owner. Also upon execution of this Contract by the Contractor, the Contractor shall identify to the Owner and the Design Professional, in writing, those parties intended as subcontractors on the Project not otherwise named in Exhibit E. The Owner shall, in writing, state any objections the Owner may have to one or more of such subcontractors. The Contractor shall not enter into a subcontract with an intended subcontractor with reference to whom the Owner objects. All subcontracts shall afford the Contractor rights against the subcontractor which correspond to those rights afforded to the Owner against the Contractor herein, including those rights of Contract Termination as set forth in this Contract. All subcontractors shall, throughout the duration of this Contract, be properly licensed as Idaho Public Works Contractors.


15.2 The Contractor conditionally assigns each of its subcontracts related to the Project to the Owner. All subcontracts between the Contractor and the subcontractors shall obligate the subcontractor to such conditional assignment. Upon a Termination by the Owner for cause under Paragraph 20.1, the Owner may accept such conditional assignment by written notification to the applicable subcontractor and to the Contractor. Such acceptance is subject to the rights of the Surety, if any, relating to the Contract.

ARTICLE 16

CHANGES IN THE WORK 16.1 General

.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article and elsewhere in the Contract Documents; and

.2 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work.

16.2 Change Orders

.1 A “Change Order” is a written instrument prepared by the Design Professional and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Design Professional, stating their agreement upon: a change in the work, any adjustment in the Fixed Price Contract Amount and any adjustment in the Contract Time;

.2 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Fixed Price Contract Amount may include those listed in subparagraph 16.3.4;

.3 The amount allowed for overhead and profit on any Change Order is limited to the amounts indicated in subparagraph 16.3.11;

.4 Any Change Order prepared, including those arising by reason of the parties’ mutual agreement or by mediation, shall constitute a final and full settlement of all matters relating to or affected by the change in the Work, including all direct, indirect and consequential costs associated with such change and any and all adjustments to the Fixed Price Contract Amount and Contract Time. In the event a Change Order increases the Fixed Price Contract Amount, the Contractor shall include the Work covered by such Change Order in the Contractor’s Request for Payment as if such Work were originally part of the Project and Contract Documents; and

.5 By the execution of a Change Order, the Contractor agrees and acknowledges that it has had sufficient time and opportunity to examine the change in Work which is the subject of the Change Order and that it has undertaken all reasonable efforts to discover and disclose any concealed or unknown conditions which may to any extent affect the Contractor’s ability to perform in accordance with the Change Order. Aside from those matters specifically set forth in the Change Order, the Owner shall not be obligated to make any adjustments to either the Fixed Price Contract Amount or Contract Time by reason of any conditions affecting the change in Work addressed by the Change Order, which could have reasonably been discovered or disclosed by the Contractor’s examination.

16.3 Construction Change Directive (CCD)

.1 A “Construction Change Directive” is a written order prepared by the Design Professional and signed by the Owner and Design Professional directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Fixed Price Contract Amount or Contract Time or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract, consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Fixed Price Contract Amount and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly;

.2 A Construction Change Directive, within limitations, may also be used to incorporate minor changes in the Work agreed to by the Design Professional’s representative, the Owner’s Field


Representative and the Contractor’s superintendent or project manager. The limits of these representatives’ authority with regard to Construction Change Directives shall be documented in writing by the Design Professional, Owner and Contractor;

.3 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order;

.4 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Fixed Price Contract Amount, the adjustment shall be based on one (1) of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

.4 As provided in subparagraph 16.3.7;

.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Design Professional in writing within forty-eight (48) hours of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Fixed Price Contract Amount or Contract Time;

.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Fixed Price Contract Amount and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be incorporated into a future Change Order;

.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustments in the Fixed Price Contract Amount or Contract Time, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by the Design Professional on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Fixed Price Contract Amount, an allowance for overhead and profit in accordance with subparagraph 16.3.11. In such case of an increase in Fixed Price Contract Amount, and also under subparagraph 16.3.4, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Design Professional may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this subsection shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom and workers’ compensation insurance;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of permit fees and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and

.5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change;

.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Fixed Price Contract Amount shall be for the actual net cost of the decrease, confirmed by the Design Professional. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change;


.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work shall be included in the Contractor’s Request for Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties’ agreement with part or all of such costs;

.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination by the Design Professional concerning the adjustments in the Fixed Price Contract Amount and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order; and

.11 For purposes of subparagraphs 16.2.3 and 16.3.7, the allowance for combined overhead, profit, bonds and insurance shall be limited as follows, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents:

.1 For changes, the amount allowed for overhead, profit, bonds and insurance for the Contractor and all subcontractors of any tier combined shall not exceed fifteen percent (15%) of direct costs; or

.2 The Contractor will determine the apportionment between the Contractor and its subcontractors of allowable amounts of overhead, profit, bonds and insurance.

16.4 The Design Professional will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Fixed Price Contract Amount or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly.

ARTICLE 17

DISCOVERING AND CORRECTING DEFECTIVE OR INCOMPLETE WORK 17.1 If the Contractor covers, conceals or obscures its Work in violation of this Contract or in violation of a directive or request from the Owner or the Design Professional, such Work shall be uncovered and displayed for the Owner's or Design Professional's inspection upon request and shall be reworked at no cost in time or money to the Owner. 17.2 If any of the Work is covered, concealed or obscured in a manner not addressed by Paragraph 17.1, it shall, if directed by the Owner or the Design Professional, be uncovered and displayed for the Owner's or Design Professional's inspection. If the uncovered Work conforms strictly with this Contract, the costs incurred by the Contractor to uncover and subsequently replace such Work shall be borne by the Owner. Otherwise, such costs shall be borne by the Contractor. 17.3 The Contractor shall, at no cost in time or money to the Owner, promptly correct Work (fabricated, installed or completed) rejected by the Owner or by the Design Professional as defective or that fails to conform to this Contract whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion. Additionally, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all testing, inspections and other expenses incurred as a result thereof. 17.4 In addition to any other warranty obligations in this Contract, the Contractor shall be specifically obligated to correct, upon written direction from the Owner, any and all defective or nonconforming Work for a period of twelve (12) months following Substantial Completion. 17.5 The Owner may, but shall in no event be required to, choose to accept defective or nonconforming Work. In such event, the Fixed Price Contract Amount shall be reduced by the lesser of: (i) the reasonable costs of removing and correcting the defective or nonconforming Work; or (ii) the difference between the fair market value of the Project as constructed and the fair market value of the Project had it not been constructed in such a manner as to include defective or nonconforming Work. If the remaining portion of the unpaid Fixed Price Contract Amount, if any, is insufficient to compensate the Owner for the acceptance of defective or nonconforming Work, the Contractor shall, upon written demand from the Owner, pay the Owner such remaining compensation for accepting defective or nonconforming work.


ARTICLE 18 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR

18.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of ninety (90) consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a subcontractor, sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order by a court or by another public authority having jurisdiction and authority which requires all Work to be stopped; or

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, which requires all Work to be stopped.

18.2 In such event, the Contractor shall be entitled to recover from the Owner as though the Owner had terminated the Contractor's performance under this Contract pursuant to Paragraph 20.3.

ARTICLE 19 OWNER'S RIGHT TO SUSPEND CONTRACTOR'S PERFORMANCE

19.1 The Owner may, at any time and without cause, order the Contractor, in writing, to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. If the Owner directs any such suspension, the Contractor must immediately comply with same. 19.2 In the event the Owner directs a suspension of performance under this Article, and such suspension is through no fault of the Contractor, the Fixed Price Contract Amount and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by such suspension, delay or interruption to cover the Contractor's reasonable costs, actually incurred and paid, of:

.1 Demobilization and remobilization, including such costs paid to subcontractors;

.2 Preserving and protecting Work in place;

.3 Storage of materials or equipment purchased for the Project, including insurance thereon; and

.4 Performing in a later, or during a longer, time frame than that provided by this Contract.

19.3 The adjustment of the Fixed Price Contract Amount shall include an amount for a reasonable profit. The adjustment of the Fixed Price Contract Amount shall not include any amount not otherwise allowed under this Contract, including any limitations applicable to Claims. The Contractor shall provide supporting documentation related to any increase upon request of the Owner. No adjustment shall be made to the extent:

.1 That performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 That an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

ARTICLE 20 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER

The Owner may terminate this Contract in accordance with the following terms and conditions: 20.1 If the Contractor does not perform the Work, or any part thereof, in accordance with the Contract Documents, or in a timely manner; does not supply adequate labor, supervisory personnel, or proper equipment or materials; fails to pay subcontractors; fails to timely discharge its obligations for labor, equipment, and materials; proceeds to disobey applicable law; or otherwise breaches this Contract, then the Owner, in addition to any other rights it may have against the Contractor, may terminate the Contract and assume control of the Project site and of all materials and equipment at the site and may complete the Work. In such case, the Contractor shall not be paid further until the Work is complete. Upon such Termination, the Owner may, subject to any superior rights of the


Surety, take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; accept assignment of those subcontracts conditionally assigned under Paragraph 15.2; and finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. 20.2 When the Owner terminates the Contract for cause as provided in Paragraph 20.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished and shall only be entitled to payment for Work satisfactorily performed by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. If the costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Design Professional’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. This obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. The Contractor shall also terminate outstanding orders and subcontracts. The Contractor shall settle the liabilities and claims arising out of the termination of subcontracts and orders. In the event the employment of the Contractor is terminated by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 20.1 and it is subsequently determined by a court of competent jurisdiction that such termination was without cause, such termination shall thereupon be deemed a Termination under Paragraph 20.3 and the provisions of Paragraph 20.3 shall apply.

20.3 The Owner may, at any time and for any reason, terminate this Contract. The Owner shall give no less than seven (7) days’ written notice of such Termination to the Contractor specifying when termination becomes effective. The Contractor shall incur no further obligations in connection with the Work and the Contractor shall stop Work when such Termination becomes effective. The Contractor shall also terminate outstanding orders and subcontracts. The Contractor shall settle the liabilities and claims arising out of the termination of subcontracts and orders. The Owner may direct the Contractor to assign the Contractor's right, title and interest under termination orders or subcontracts to the Owner or its designee. The Contractor shall transfer title and deliver to the Owner such completed or partially completed Work and materials, equipment, parts, fixtures, information and Contract rights as the Contractor has. When terminated pursuant to this section, the following shall apply:

.1 The Contractor shall submit a Termination Claim to the Owner and the Design Professional specifying the amounts claimed due because of the Termination, together with costs, pricing or other supporting data required by the Owner or the Design Professional. Failure by the Contractor to file a Termination Claim within ninety (90) days from the effective date of termination shall be deemed a complete waiver by the Contractor of any right to any payment;

.2 Before or after receipt of the Termination Claim, the Owner and the Contractor may agree to the compensation, if any, due to the Contractor hereunder; and

.3 If the Contractor has filed the Termination Claim but the Contractor and the Owner do not agree on an amount due to the Contractor, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the following amounts:

.1 Unpaid Contract prices for labor, materials, equipment and other services provided or perfected prior to termination and acceptable to or accepted by the Owner;

.2 Reasonable costs incurred in preparing to perform the terminated portion of the Work, and in terminating the Contractor's performance, plus a fair and reasonable allowance for direct job-site overhead and profit related to such preparation (such profit shall not include anticipated profit or consequential damages); provided, however, that if it appears that the Contractor would have not profited or would have sustained a loss if the entire Contract would have been completed, no profit shall be allowed or included and the amount of compensation shall be reduced to reflect the anticipated loss, if any; and

.3 Reasonable costs of settling and paying claims arising out of the Termination of subcontracts or orders pursuant to this Paragraph 20.3.

20.4 Costs described in subparagraphs 20.3.3.2 or 20.3.3.3 above shall not include amounts paid in accordance with other provisions hereof. In no event shall the total sum to be paid the Contractor under subparagraph 20.3.3 exceed the total Fixed Price Contract Amount, as properly adjusted, reduced by the amount of payments previously or otherwise made and by any other deductions permitted under this Contract and shall in no event include duplication of payment.

ARTICLE 21


CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 21.1 The Contractor, subcontractor and sub-subcontractor shall purchase and maintain in full force and effect from a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the State of Idaho such insurance as will protect the Contractor, subcontractor and sub-subcontractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's or subcontractor’s operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:

.1 Claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts which are applicable to the work to be performed;

.2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease or death of the Contractor's employees;

.3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees;

.4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained: (i) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor; or (ii) by another person;

.5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting there from;

.6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;

.7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and

.8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Article 11.

21.2 The insurance required by Paragraph 21.1 above shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in this Contract or as required by law, whichever is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. In addition, for any insurance required that is obtained on a claims-made basis, “tail coverage” is required at the completion of the Work for twenty-four (24) months. Continuous claims-made coverage will be acceptable in lieu of “tail coverage” provided the retroactive date is on or before the effective date of this Contract or twenty-four (24) months “prior acts” coverage is provided.

.1 The insurance required by Paragraph 21.1 above shall be written for not less than the following limits:

.1 Workers' Compensation and Employer’s Liability

(a) State Workers Compensation: Statutory

(b) Employer's Liability: $100,000 per Accident

$500,000 Disease, Policy Limit

$100,000 Disease, Each Employee

.2 Comprehensive Commercial General Liability and Umbrella Liability Insurance. Contractor shall maintain Commercial General Liability (“CGL”) and, if necessary, commercial umbrella insurance with a limit of not less than $1,000,000 each occurrence. If such CGL insurance contains a general aggregate limit, it shall apply separately to this project location;


CGL insurance shall be written on Insurance Services Office (“ISO”) occurrence form CG 00 01 12 04 (or a substitute form providing equivalent coverage) and shall cover liability arising from premises, operation, independent contractors, products-completed operations, personal (including employee acts) and advertising injury and liability assumed under an insured contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract). As applicable, coverage must also include a broad form CGL endorsement if the substitute insurance is a 1973 edition CGL or its equivalent;

Owner shall be included as an additional insured under the CGL, using ISO additional

insured endorsement CG 20 10 and CG 20 37 or their equivalent, which endorsement shall include coverage for the Owner with respect to liability arising out of the Work, including completed operations of Contractor, and which coverage shall be maintained in effect for the benefit of Owner for a period of two (2) years following the completion of the work specified in this Contract. Additional insured coverage as required in this subparagraph shall apply as primary insurance with respect to any other insurance or self-insurance programs afforded to the Owner;

(a) For the hazards of explosion, collapse, and damage to underground property, commonly referred to as XCU, coverage shall be required if the exposures exist; and

This coverage may be provided by the subcontractor if the Owner and prime Contractor are named as additional insureds;

.3 Business Auto and Umbrella Liability Insurance: Contractor shall maintain business, auto liability and, if necessary, commercial umbrella liability insurance with a limit of not less than $1,000,000 each accident;

Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned, hired, and non-owned autos);

Business auto coverage shall be written on ISO form CA 00 01, CA 00 05, CA 00 12, CA 00 20 or a substitute form providing equivalent liability coverage. If necessary, the policy shall be endorsed to provide contractual liability coverage equivalent to that provided in the 1990 and later editions of CA 00 01;

If hazardous waste will be hauled, Contractor shall obtain pollution liability coverage equivalent to that provided under the ISO pollution liability-broadened coverage for covered autos endorsement (CA 99 48) and the Motor Carrier Act endorsement (MCS 90) shall be attached;

.4 If the General Liability coverages are provided by Commercial Liability policies the:

.1 General Aggregate shall be not less than $2,000,000; and

.2 Fire legal liability shall be provided in an amount not less than $100,000 per occurrence; and

.5 Umbrella Excess Liability. An umbrella policy may be used in combination with other policies to provide the required coverage.

21.3 The Owner shall be named as additional insured or loss payee, as applicable, on the insurance required in subparagraphs 21.2.1.2, 21.2.1.3 and 21.2.1.5 above, and the insurance shall contain the severability of interest clause as follows:

"The insurance afforded herein applies separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the company's 'liability.’ "

21.4 The Contractor may include all subcontractors as insureds under the Contractor’s policies in lieu of separate policies by each subcontractor. The Contractor must furnish the State of Idaho, Idaho Transportation Department, with the required endorsements or certificates of insurance from each subcontractor which names the subcontractor, its officials, employees and volunteers as insureds.


21.5 Certificates of Insurance for Workers’ Compensation shall be on the standard form. Certificates of Insurance for Commercial or Comprehensive General Liability shall be the most current ACORD Form 25 or 28, must be acceptable to the Owner and shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. The Owner may require proof of coverage by an endorsement. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Contractor’s Request for Payment as required by Article 7. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief.

ARTICLE 22 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE

The Owner, at its option, may purchase or maintain insurance for protection against claims which may arise from operations under the Contract.

ARTICLE 23 PROPERTY INSURANCE

23.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase or maintain, from a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the State of Idaho, property insurance written on a builders risk "all-risk" or equivalent policy form in an amount not less than the initial Fixed Price Contract Amount. Such property insurance shall be maintained until final payment to the Contractor has been made. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, subcontractors and sub-subcontractors. 23.2 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, but not necessarily be limited to insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, temporary buildings and debris removal, including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover necessary and reasonable expenses for the Design Professional's expenses required as a result of such insured loss. 23.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs of such deductibles. 23.4 Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Owner will purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and testing. 23.5 Loss of Use Insurance. The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. 23.6 Waivers of Subrogation. The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against: (i) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other; and (ii) the Design Professional, Design Professional’s consultants, separate contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages to the Work caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Article or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Design Professional, Design Professional’s consultants, separate contractors, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. The Owner does not waive its subrogation rights to the extent of its property insurance on structures or portions of structures that do not comprise the Work. 23.7 The Contractor authorizes the Owner to negotiate and agree on the value and extent of, and to collect the proceeds payable with respect to, any loss under a policy of insurance carried by the Owner pursuant to any of the provisions of this Article. The Owner shall have full right and authority to compromise any claim, or to enforce any claim by legal action or otherwise, or to release and discharge any insurer, by and on behalf of the Owner and Contractor. The Owner shall provide written notice to Contractor of: (i) its having reached any such settlement or adjustment with an insurer; and (ii) the receipt of any funds pursuant to this Article. Any objection by the Contractor


to a settlement or adjustment made under this Article must be made in writing to the Owner within five (5) business days of the notice from the Owner. The Owner and the Contractor agree to attempt to resolve the dispute by mutual agreement. 23.8 A loss under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner and made payable to the Owner for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause. 23.9 The Owner shall deposit proceeds so received, in a manner in which such proceeds can be separately accounted for, which proceeds the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract pursuant to Article 20, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 16. 23.10 The Contractor shall pay subcontractors their shares of the insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require subcontractors to acknowledge the Owner’s authority under this Article 23 and make payments to their sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 23.11 Nothing contained in this Article 23 shall preclude the Contractor from obtaining, solely at its own expense, additional insurance not otherwise required.

ARTICLE 24 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS

24.1 The Contractor shall furnish separate performance and payment bonds to the Owner. Each bond shall set forth a penal sum in an amount not less than the Fixed Price Contract Amount and shall include a power of attorney attached to each bond. The signature of both the Contractor (principal) and the Surety are required. If the Surety is incorporated, both bonds must have the corporate seal. Each bond furnished by the Contractor shall incorporate by reference the terms of this Contract as fully as though they were set forth verbatim in such bonds. In the event the Fixed Price Contract Amount is adjusted by Change Order executed by the Contractor, the penal sum of both the performance bond and the payment bond shall be deemed increased by like amount. The performance and payment bonds furnished by the Contractor shall be AIA Document A312, or a standard surety form certified approved to be the same as the AIA Document A312, and shall be executed by a Surety, or Sureties, reasonably acceptable to the Owner and authorized to do business in the State of Idaho. 24.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. 24.3 It is the Contractor's obligation to notify the Surety in the event of changes in the Contract Documents, which in the absence of notification might serve to discharge the Surety's obligations, duties or liability under bonds or the Contract.

ARTICLE 25

PROJECT RECORDS 25.1 All documents relating in any manner whatsoever to the Project, or any designated portion thereof, which are in the possession of the Contractor or any subcontractor of the Contractor, shall be made available to the Owner or the Design Professional for inspection and copying upon written request. Furthermore, said documents shall be made available, upon request by the Owner, to any state, federal or other regulatory authority and any such authority may review, inspect and copy such records. Said records include all drawings, plans, specifications, submittals, correspondence, minutes, memoranda, tape recordings, videos or other writings or things which document the Project, its design and its construction. Said records expressly include those documents reflecting the cost of construction to the Contractor. The Contractor shall maintain and protect these documents for no less than four (4) years after final completion or termination of the Contract or for any longer period of time as may be required by law or good construction practice.

ARTICLE 26 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS


26.1 The law is hereby agreed to be the law of the State of Idaho. The parties further agree that venue for any proceeding related to this Contract shall be in Boise, Ada County, Idaho, unless otherwise mutually agreed by the parties. 26.2 Pursuant to Section 54-1904A, Idaho Code, within thirty (30) days after award of this Contract, the Contractor shall file with the Idaho State Tax Commission, with a copy to the Owner, a signed statement showing the date of Contract award, the names and addresses of the home offices of contracting parties, including all subcontractors, the state of incorporation, the Project Number and a general description of the type and location of the Work, the amount of the prime contracts and all subcontracts and all other relevant information which may be required on forms which may be prescribed by the Idaho State Tax Commission. 26.3 The Contractor, in consideration of securing the business of erecting or constructing public works in the State of Idaho, recognizing that the business in which it is engaged is of a transitory character, and that in the pursuit thereof, its property used therein may be without the state when taxes, excises or license fees to which it is liable become payable, agrees:

.1 To pay promptly when due all taxes (other than on real property), excises and license fees due to the State of Idaho, its sub-divisions, and municipal and quasi-municipal corporations therein, accrued or accruing during the term of this Contract, whether or not the same shall be payable at the end of such term;

.2 That if the said taxes, excises and license fees are not payable at the end of said term, but liability for the payment thereof exists even though the same constitute liens upon its property, to secure the same to the satisfaction of the respective officers charged with the collection thereof; and

.3 That, in the event of its default in the payment or securing of such taxes, excises and license fees, to consent that the department, officer, board or taxing unit entering into this Contract may withhold from any payment due it hereunder the estimated amount of such accrued and accruing taxes, excises and license fees for the benefit of all taxing units to which said Contractor is liable.

26.4 Before entering into a Contract, the Contractor shall be authorized to do business in the State of Idaho and shall submit a properly executed Contractor's Affidavit Concerning Taxes (Exhibit D). 26.5 Pursuant to Section 44-1002, Idaho Code, it is provided that each Contractor "must employ ninety-five percent (95%) bona fide Idaho residents as employees on any job under any such contract except where under such contracts fifty (50) or less persons are employed the contractor may employ ten percent (10%) nonresidents, provided, however, in all cases employers must give preference to the employment of bona fide residents in the performance of said work, and no contract shall be let to any person, firm, association, or corporation refusing to execute an agreement with the above mentioned provisions in it; provided, that, in contracts involving the expenditure of federal aid funds this act shall not be enforced in such a manner as to conflict with or be contrary to the federal statutes prescribing a labor preference to honorably discharged soldiers, sailors, and marines, prohibiting as unlawful any other preference or discrimination among citizens of the United States." (Ref. Section 44-1001, Idaho Code) 26.6 The Contractor shall maintain, in compliance with Title 72, Chapter 17, Idaho Code, a drug-free workplace program throughout the duration of this Contract and shall only subcontract work to subcontractors who have programs that comply with Title 72, Chapter 17, Idaho Code. 26.7 As between the Owner and Contractor as to acts or failures to act, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any legal cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events in accordance with Idaho law. 26.8 The Contractor and its subcontractors and sub-subcontractors shall comply with all applicable Idaho statutes with specific reference to Idaho Public Works Contractors’ licensing laws in the State of Idaho, Title 54, Chapter 19, Idaho Code, as amended. 26.9 The Contractor shall not knowingly hire or engage any illegal aliens or persons not authorized to work in the United States and take steps to verify that it does not hire or engage any illegal aliens or persons not authorized to work in the United States. Any misrepresentation in this regard or any employment of persons not authorized to


work in the United States constitutes a material breach and shall be cause for the imposition of monetary penalties not to exceed five percent (5%) of the Fixed Price Contract Amount per violation and/or Termination of this Contract. The Contractor also acknowledges that, if it is a natural person, it is subject to Title 67, Chapter 79, Idaho Code regarding verification of lawful presence in the United States.

ARTICLE 27 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY

The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows: 27.1 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age or national origin. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age or national origin. Such action shall include the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination. 27.2 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall, in all solicitation or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf; state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, age or national origin.

ARTICLE 28 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

28.1 Each party binds itself, its successors, assigns, executors, administrators or other representatives to the other party hereto and to successors, assigns, executors, administrators or other representatives of such other party in connection with all terms and conditions of this Contract. The Contractor shall not assign this Contract or any part of it or right or obligation pursuant to it without prior written consent of the Owner. If Contractor attempts to make assignment without consent of Owner, Contractor shall remain legally responsible for all obligations under this Contract.

ARTICLE 29 SEVERABILITY

29.1 In the event any provision or section of this Contract conflicts with applicable law or is otherwise held to be unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall nevertheless be enforceable and shall be carried into effect.

ARTICLE 30 MEDIATION

30.1 Contractor Claims for additional cost or time are subject to Article 13, shall be reviewed as provided in accordance with that Article and, as a condition precedent to litigation, are subject to dispute resolution attempts and mediation in accordance with this Article. All other issues and disputes arising from this contract are also subject to dispute resolution attempts & mediation in accordance with this Article, as a condition precedent to litigation. 30.2 The parties agree that resolution of any dispute or disagreement without formal legal proceedings is to their mutual benefit and to the benefit of the Project. 30.3 The parties agree to make every reasonable attempt to resolve any issues or disputes informally. The parties further agree that prior to the institution by either of legal or equitable proceedings of any kind, and as a condition precedent thereto, any dispute between the Contractor and the Owner related to the Contract, including a dispute over the Owner’s decision regarding a Claim, shall be subject to mediation as follows:

.1 If the issue to be mediated involves only a dispute regarding the Contract Time, no request to mediate shall be made unless liquidated damages have been assessed by the Owner. If the issue to be mediated involves a Claim or other financial dispute, no request to mediate shall be made unless the amount is $50,000 or more or until there are cumulative Claims or disputes amounting to $50,000 or more;


provided, however, that a mediation request can be made as to any Claim or financial matter at any time after Substantial Completion;

.2 The party seeking mediation shall notify the other party in writing of its mediation request. In such written request, the requesting party must clearly describe the issues it believes are subject to mediation;

.3 Within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the mediation request, the non-requesting party shall respond in writing to the request;

.4 Unless the Owner and the Contractor agree to other rules for mediation, mediation shall be in accordance with the Construction Industry Rules of Arbitration and Mediation Procedures in effect at the time of the mediation;

.5 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally; provided, however, that if a party makes a written request to the mediator without satisfying the requirements of this section and by doing so incurs any costs or fees, that party shall be solely responsible for the costs or fees;

.6 Unless otherwise mutually agreed to by the parties, the mediation shall be in Boise, Ada County, Idaho;

.7 The parties shall cooperate in arranging the other details of mediation, such as selection of the mediator, mediation dates and times;

.8 The parties agree that all parties necessary to resolve the matter shall be parties to the same mediation proceeding; provided, however, that no subcontractor or sub-subcontractor shall attend the mediation absent advance notice and consent from the Owner;

.9 Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having proper jurisdiction; and

.10 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall continue the Work and maintain the approved schedules during any mediation proceedings. If the Contractor continues to perform, the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents.

30.4 If mediation fails to resolve the dispute, either party may file an action in the courts of Idaho in accordance with the venue provision contained in this Contract.

ARTICLE 31 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

31.1 The Contractor and Owner waive claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes:

.1 Damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons.

.2 Damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses, including the compensation of personnel stationed there; for losses of income, financing, business and reputation; loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and for loss of profit except profit arising directly from the Work.

31.2 This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Articles 18 and 20. Nothing contained in this paragraph shall be deemed to preclude an award of the assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Contract on the dates set forth below.

OWNER State of Idaho Idaho Transportation Department

By: Date Executed Tony Pirc, Capital Facilities Manager

CONTRACTOR (Contractor’s Name- Typed)

SEAL

By: Date Executed Signature

Printed Name

Title


EXHIBIT A

OWNER'S PROJECT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION: ITD Project No.: FM-22001

Project Title: ITD POTLATCH CONTAINMENT FACILITY Project Location : ITD Potlatch Site, 1557 State Highway 6, Potlatch, ID 83855 General Project Description: new 2,100 SF concrete containment foundation with pre-engineered metal building roof cover; painting exposed steel structure; de-icing solution storage tanks and associated plumbing; electrical includes new lighting, power receptacles, pump disconnects, and pump controls. ADDENDA: Addenda applicable to the Contract and made a part of are as follows: Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated Addendum No. Dated FIXED PRICE CONTRACT AMOUNT AND ACCEPTED ALTERNATES: Base Bid Amount: $.00 Alternate No. __ ( ) add $.00 Alternate No. __ ( ) add $.00 Alternate No. __ ( ) add $.00 Total Fixed Price Contract Amount ( ) Dollars $.00 Contractor’s Requests for Payment are to be submitted for Work accomplished through the day of each month as described in Paragraph 7.3. TIME FOR PERFORMANCE AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: A. The Contractor shall commence construction of its scope of the Work in accordance with the Notice to

Proceed issued by the Owner, and which will become Exhibit F to this Contract. B. The Contractor shall accomplish Substantial Completion as defined in Article 6 of the Contract and within

the specified consecutive calendar days (See Section 011000) from the date authorized to proceed in the Notice to Proceed.

C. The amount of liquidated damages per day for each and every day of unexcused delay as outlined in

Article 6 on the Contract is: Five Hundred Dollars ($500)

DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS The Owner shall furnish the Contractor 3 sets of Drawings and Project Manuals.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

See Section 011000 for separate substantial completion dates.


EXHIBIT B ADDRESSES and AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES: The names, addresses and authorized representatives of the Owner, the Contractor and the Design Professional are: Owner: Idaho Transportation Department Tony Pirc, Capital Facilities Manager P O Box 7129 Boise ID 83707-1129

Project Manager: Tony Pirc, Capital Facilities Manager

Telephone: (208) 334-8600 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: n/a May sign for Owner: Yes [ X ] No [ ] Change Orders

Field Representative: Roy Hill

Telephone: (208) 799-4256 E-mail: [email protected] Fax: n/a May sign for Owner: Yes [ ] No [ X ] Change Orders: up to $0

CONTRACTOR: (company name)

(address) (city, state, zip) (telephone and FAX) Public Works Contractors License No.

Officer: (name and title)

(telephone) (E-mail)

Contractor’s Project Manager: (name)

(telephone and FAX) (E-mail) May sign for Contractor: Yes [ ] No [ ] Change Orders: up to: $____.00 Construction Change Authorizations: up to: $______.00 Contractor’s Request for Payment

Contractor’s Superintendent: (name)

(telephone and FAX) (E-mail) May sign for Contractor: Yes [ ] No [ ] Construction Change Authorizations: up to $______.00


DESIGN PROFESSIONAL:

Castellaw Kom Architects 850 Main Street Lewiston, ID 83501 (208) 746-0183 (208) 746-7267

Professional’s Project Manager: Greg Castellaw, AIA

Professional License No. AR-1630 (208) 746-0183 (Office) (208) 746-7267 (Fax) [email protected]

Professional’s Field Representative: Ben Larsen

(208) 746-0183 (Office) (208) 746-7267 (Fax) [email protected] May sign for Design Professional: Field Reports Yes [ x ] No [ ] Change Order Proposal Requests Yes [ x ] No [ ] Construction Change Authorization: Yes [ x ] No [ ] Construction Change Order Yes [ x ] No [ ] Design Professional's Supplemental Instructions Yes [ x ] No [ ] Interpretations of the Contract Documents Yes [ x ] No [ ] Contractor’s Request for Payment Yes [ x ] No [ ] Acceptance of Substantial Completion Yes [ x ] No [ ] Acceptance of final completion Yes [ x ] No [ ]


EXHIBIT C

LIST OF DRAWINGS

SHEET DRAWINGS ARCHITECTURAL: A1.0 COVER, INDEX TO DRAWINGS, LIST OF ALTERNATES, VICINITY MAP, GENERAL

PROJECT NOTES, SITE PLAN A2.0 FLOOR PLAN, BUILDING ELEVATIONS, DETAILS A3.0 GENERAL STRUCTURAL NOTES, STRUCTURAL SECTION. PLUMBING: P0.0 INDEX, LEGEND, AND SYMBOLS P3.0 SCHEDULES & SCHEMATICS P4.1 PLUMBING FLOOR PLAN P5.0 PLUMBING DETAILS

LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 10 00 Summary 01 23 00 Alternates 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 25 01 Substitution Request Form 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 01 77 01 Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 50 01 Existing Photos (For Reference Only) DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 35 00 Concrete Finishing DIVISION 04 – MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 05 – METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications


DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTIC, COMPOSITES NOT USED

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION NOT USED

DIVISION 08 – DOORS AND WINDOWS NOT USED

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09 90 00 Painting 09 96 10 Rubber Matting

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES NOT USED

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT 11 90 10 Storage Tanks

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS NOT USED

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems

DIVISION 14 TO 21 – NOT USED

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment 22 05 19 Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping And Equipment 22 11 16 Brine, Boost, & Mag System Piping 22 11 19 Brine, Boost, & Mag System Specialties 22 11 23 Brine, Boost, & Mag System Pumps

DIVISON 23- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) NOT USED DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 Electrical DIVISION 27 TO 28 – NOT USED DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK 31 20 00 Earth Moving DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS NOT USED

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES 33 46 00 Subdrainage


EXHIBIT D

CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT CONCERNING TAXES STATE OF ___________________) COUNTY OF _________________) Pursuant to the Title 63, Chapter 15, Idaho Code I, the undersigned, being duly sworn, depose and certify that all taxes, excises and license fees due to the State or its taxing units, for which I or my property is liable then due or delinquent, has been paid, or arrangements have been made, before entering into a Contract for construction of any public works in the State of Idaho. SEAL Name of Contractor

Address

City and State By: (Signature)

Subscribed and sworn to before me this ___________________ day of _________________, . NOTARY PUBLIC Residing at: Commission expires:


EXHIBIT E

NAMED SUBCONTRACTORS: Pursuant to Section 67-2310, Idaho Code, commonly known as the naming law, the names and addresses of the entities who will perform the plumbing, heating and air conditioning and electrical work were named in the bid and are as follows:

Plumbing Contractor (Name) (Address) Idaho Public Works Contractors License No. Idaho Plumbing Contractors License No. Electrical Contractor (Name) (Address) Idaho Public Works Contractors License No. Idaho Electrical Contractors License No.


EXHIBIT F

NOTICE TO PROCEED TO CONTRACTOR: ITD PROJECT NUMBER: FM-22001

CONTRACT DATE: ARCHITECT: Castellaw Kom Architects 850 Main Street CONTRACT AMOUNT: $ Lewiston ID 83501 DATE OF ISSUANCE: OWNER: State of Idaho

You are hereby notified to commence work on the above referenced contract on/or before and are to

substantially complete the work within consecutive calendar days thereafter; therefore your contract

completion date is . The contract provides for the sum of $ as liquidated damages for each consecutive calendar day after the above established substantial completion date that the work remains incomplete. Completion date will be established by “Certificate of Substantial Completion.” You are reminded that any changes to the original contract document regarding either cost or completion date must be effected by a change order approved by this department. Your payment estimates must be submitted on Idaho Transportation Department forms included herein. We will be most happy to assist you in preparing the payment estimate forms. Roy Hill, TSEA, District 2 Operations, has been appointed Field Representative for this project. Please contact him at (208) 799-4256 prior to beginning work. A pre-construction meeting will be held , at , at

(location) Sincerely, Tony Pirc Capital Facilities Manager DISTRIBUTION: Tax Commission Division of Building Safety Risk Management (w/ Builder’s Risk Application, if applicable) (Project Manager) Fiscal Office TAX ID xx-xxxxxxx


EXHIBIT G

Idaho State Tax Commission REQUEST FOR TAX RELEASE

Date:

PART I -- AWARDING AGENCY INFORMATION:

Name of agency Mailing address City, state, and ZIP Code

Contact name Phone number Email address

PART II -- CONTRACTOR INFORMATION:

Name of contractor Mailing address City, state, and ZIP Code

Federal EIN Contact name Phone number Email address

PART III -- CONSTRUCTION/CONTRACT MANAGER INFORMATION (if applicable):

Name of business Mailing address City, state, and ZIP Code

Federal EIN Contact name Phone number Email address

Send a copy of the approved Tax Release to: Awarding Agency Contractor Construction Manager

NOTE: We will email all copies unless otherwise requested

PART IV -- PROJECT INFORMATION:

Name of project Location of project

Description of project

Project number assigned by awarding agency Project start date Project completion date Final/closing contract amount (includes all change orders)

$

Did any government entities supply materials which were installed by this contractor or its subs?: Yes No

If YES, list these materials and their dollar values. (Attach additional information if needed)

List Materials List Dollar Values of Materials $ $ $

Send to: Contract Desk/Sales Tax Audit Idaho State Tax Commission PO Box 36 Boise ID 83722-0410 Phone: (208) 334-7618 • Fax: (208) 332-6619 • Email: [email protected]

NOTE: Please allow 30 days to process a Tax Release Request. You must send a complete, signed Form WH-5 Public Works

Contract Report to the Idaho State Tax Commission to complete this request.


EXHIBIT H

RELEASE OF CLAIMS

(TO BE COMPLETED FOR FINAL PAYMENT)

I, , do hereby release the State of Idaho

from any and all claims of any character whatsoever arising under and by virtue of

contract number Dated as

amended, except as herein stated.

Dated Contractor

ITD FM-22001 Potlatch Containment Facility SECTION 01 10 00

Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 SUMMARY Castellaw Kom Architects

Issued 06/28/19 Project #19022 (CKA) Page 1 of 3

SECTION 011000 – SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Access to site. 4. Coordination with occupants. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification and drawing conventions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Potlatch Containment Facility.

1. Project Location: ITD District 2, 1557 State Highway 6, Potlatch, ID 83855.

B. Owner: Idaho Transportation Department.

1. Owner's Representative: Tony Pirc, Capital Facilities Manager

2. Owner's Representative (Local): Roy Hill, District 2

C. Architect: Castellaw Kom Architects, 850 Main Street, Lewiston. ID 83501

1. Architect: Greg Castellaw, AIA

2. Project Manager: Ben Larsen




1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and is summarized as follows: 1. New 2,100 SF concrete containment foundation with pre-engineered metal building

roof cover; painting exposed steel structure; de-icing solution storage tanks and associated plumbing; electrical includes new lighting, power receptacles, pump disconnects, and pump controls.

B. Type of Contract. 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 SCHEDULE

A. Construction Duration:

1. Building foundation and fully operational de-icing storage and pumping systems: 60 consecutive calendar days from Notice to Proceed to Substantial Completion.

2. Pre-Engineered Metal Building Cover and overhead lighting: 120 consecutive calendar days from Notice to Proceed to Substantial Completion.

3. De-icing system will be used by Idaho Transportation Department after completion and prior to arrival of pre-engineered metal building canopy when no work on site is being performed. Once the pre-engineered metal building canopy is delivered to the project location and ready for installation Idaho Transportation Department will use their original existing de-icing facility while the Contractor finishes the pre-engineered metal building canopy and associated work. This shall be coordinated at construction meetings prior to arrival of pre-engineered metal building canopy.

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited by the Agency’s requirement to carry on operations adjacent to the area of work.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Keep approach and site driveways available for Owner to access the existing

yard area and adjacent buildings. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.




1.7 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

END OF SECTION 011000


Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 ALTERNATES Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.


Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 ALTERNATES Castellaw Kom Architects


PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: Pre-engineered metal building canopy and overhead lighting.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 012500 – SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use form found in section 012501. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the

following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.




d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and

interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within ten days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 7 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 10 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.

c. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.

d. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. e. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the

Work. f. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. g. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested

substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed after bid date except where products are unavailable within construction schedule, or approved in writing from the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Castellaw Kom Architects


TO:___________________________________________________________

PROJECT:_____________________________________________________ DPW#

SPECIFIED ITEM:

_________ ___________________________________

Section Page Paragraph Description

The undersigned requests consideration of the following.

PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:___________________________________________

Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test

data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.

Attached data also includes description of changes to Contract Documents which proposed substitution will

require for its proper installation.

The undersigned states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct:

1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on the drawings.

2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design, detailing and

construction costs caused by the requested substitution.

3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or specified

warranty requirements.

4. Maintenance and service parts are locally available for the proposed substitution.

The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent

or superior to the Specified item.

Submitted by:

Signature_________________________ For use by Architect:

Firm______________________________ Accepted Accepted as Noted

Address___________________________ Not Accepted Received Too Late

Date______________________________ By_______________________________________

Telephone________________________________ Date_____________________________________

Fax______________________________________ Remarks__________________________________

Attachments:


Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 012900 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Use AIA G703 Schedule of Values form, or equal.

B. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

C. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

2. Provide separate line item of 2% for project closeout.

3. Divide substantial subcontracts into individual cost items.

4. Update the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Use AIA G702 Application for Payment form, or equal.

B. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

C. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.


Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 PAYMENT PROCEDURES Castellaw Kom Architects


D. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect prior to monthly meeting. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

F. Transmittal: Submit one signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. Copies of building permits. 6. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion (less 5% retainage) for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

I. Retainage Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit Retainage Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation itemized in Section 017701 “Conditions Precedent to Final Payment”.





Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 013100 – PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination drawings. 2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 3. Project meetings.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation

and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

1.3 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals.




5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.




10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product

Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI.

1. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

2. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within amount of days specified in the Fixed Price Construction Contract (FPCC), of receipt of the RFI response.

D. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting.

2. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Owner and Agency will coordinate a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner, Agency, Architect and Contractor, after execution of the Agreement.




1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, Owner, and Agency of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

4. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings:

1. Monthly meetings are required by contract. These meetings need to be attended by the general contractor, sub-contractors who have work ongoing or soon to start, the Project Architect, Consultant Engineers as may be required, Agency representative(s) and Owner representative(s). The Project Architect is responsible for conducting and producing minutes for these meetings. The standard DPW meeting agenda will be used.

E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 013300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals. 2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings,

record Specifications, and record Product Data. 3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of

demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.




1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal.

C. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g. 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g. 061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

D. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

E. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

F. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent

of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's

action stamp.




G. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

H. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.

a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on

accompanying Shop Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:




a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record.

4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.




5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Submit product schedule in the following format:


F. Coordination Drawings Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

G. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900 "Payment Procedures.

H. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

I. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

J. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

K. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

L. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

M. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.




N. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

O. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

R. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

S. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

T. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."

U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.




2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate whether or not the submittal is acceptable or requires resubmittal.




C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 014000 – QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

3. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.




1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.




1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and

testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies

with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of

product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.




C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329 and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.




H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Field Representative, Architect, and Owner with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or

construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard

for judging the completed Work. 6. Retain subparagraph below as the default requirement and add specific

requirements in individual Specification Sections. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections.




1.8 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified

testing agency to perform these quality-control services. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that

requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit

a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having

jurisdiction, when they so direct.

B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Field Representative, Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Field Representative, Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

E. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.




3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at

Project site.

F. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections for the following, unless noted otherwise: 1. Sub-Grade Inspections 2. Soils Backfill and Compaction Testing 3. Reinforcing Steel and Placement 4. Concrete Placement and Curing 5. Pre-Engineered Metal Building Canopy (Alternate 1)

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Field Representative, Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Field Representative and Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for the Field Representative and Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 015000 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire prevention program.





A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch-thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch-OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch-OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts. 1. Provide around construction and staging areas. Contractor to maintain

throughout the duration of construction activities.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

D. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

E. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

B. Parking: Use designated areas of Agency's existing parking areas for construction personnel.




C. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

D. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.

B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

C. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

D. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.

E. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.




C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 016000 – PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:




1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a

weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. Refer to other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that




complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.




Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 EXECUTION Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Installation of the Work. 2. Cutting and patching. 3. Progress cleaning. 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction.


1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

3. Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.




4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities , mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.




C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for

maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.




G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.




F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.

5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.




3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum

the entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.




3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements"

3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 017700 – CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and

maintenance manual requirements. 2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings,

record Specifications, and record Product Data. 3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing

Owner's personnel. 4. Section 017701 “Conditions Precedent to Final Payment” for DPW’s closeout

checklist requirements.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.




1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Agency. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

5. Retain "Schedule of Maintenance Material Items" Subparagraph below when documentation of maintenance material item submittal is required for Project.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

6. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 7. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,

and maintenance.

C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise

Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.




3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial

Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of

products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training."

6. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local

emergency responders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 10. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate

visual defects.

D. Contractor’s Checklist in order to be considered Substantially Complete: 1. Obtain Certificate of Occupancy from DBS indicating compliance with all required

inspections. 2. Provide complete operation and maintenance manuals (previously submitted to

Architect and Engineer(s) for review and approval). 3. Provide comprehensive operation and maintenance training to Owner. 4. Provide complete and updated record drawings (previously submitted to Architect

and Engineer(s) for review and approval). 5. Refer elsewhere in the Contract Documents for additional information.

E. Design Professional’s Checklist for Substantial Completion: 1. Conduct inspection to confirm the Work is substantially complete. 2. Determine a reasonable cost for completing all incomplete work, correcting and

bringing into conformance all defective and nonconforming work, and handling any outstanding or potential claims.

3. Establish a reasonable number of days to achieve final completion (30 days typical).

4. Obtain a final report documenting required special inspections and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections.

F. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.




1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."

2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.

5. Refer to Section 017701 “Conditions Precedent to Final Payment” for ‘Contractor’s Responsibilities’ and ‘Design Professional’s Responsibilities’.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element. 3. Submit list of incomplete items to Architect, Agency, and Owner.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Provide a schedule of all components and their respective warranty duration(s) to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

B. Provide copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free

condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;

clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.

j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-




obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment,

and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

o. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.

p. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO FINAL PAYMENT Castellaw Kom Architects


Conditions Precedent to Final Payment

Date: ____________________________

ITD Project No. FM-22001 Project Title: Potlatch Containment Facility Location: ITD District 2 - Potlatch Site

Send to: Copy to: Owner Design Professional Idaho Transportation Department Castellaw Kom Architects 3311 State Street 850 Main Street Boise, ID 83707 Lewiston, ID 83501 Contractor’s Responsibilities: Per Paragraph 7:13 of the Fixed Price Contract: As a condition precedent to final payment, the Contractor must furnish the owner, in the form and manner required by Owner, to be submitted to the Design Professional for approval, the following:

� Contractor’s Final Request for Payment Form has been provided;

� Release of Claims form has been provided;

� Contractor’s Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims Form has been provided (AIA G706);

� Consent of Surety to Final Payment has been provided (AIA G707);

� Confirmation of all required training (see sign-in sheet, as required), product warranties, operating manuals, instruction manuals and other record documents, drawings and items customarily required of the Contractor has been provided.

� Public Works Contract Tax Release from the Idaho Tax Commission has been provided;

� Division of Building Safety Letter of Completion/Final Inspection Sign-Off;

� Project Finalization and Start Up has been provided;

________________________________________________________________

Contractor’s Signature Date

Design Professional’s Approval for Payment:

� All Documents Required per Paragraph 7.13 of the Fixed Price Contract

� All Warranties, Guarantees, etc. have been received, approved and have been provided.

� As-Built Drawings have been received, reviewed and approved.

� Record Drawings have been completed. All of the required copies of the Record Documents and electronic media are attached and/or uploaded to OMS.

� All punch list items have been verified and signed off as complete.

To the best of my knowledge, information, and belief, and on the basis of my observations and inspections, I certify the Work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the required documentation required by Paragraph 7.13 of the fixed priced contract has been received. The entire balance, as shown on the attached Final Request for Payment, is due and payable. _________________________________________________________________

Design Professional’s Signature Date


Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 017823 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Product maintenance manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect, will return two copies.




C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.

B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

C. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that

designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.




F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.

1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

G. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.




3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name,




address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including

disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.




D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control




sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 017839 – PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications.


1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.


A. Record Drawings: Submit one set of marked-up record prints.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are issued.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.


Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Castellaw Kom Architects


b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 EXISTING PHOTOS (FOR REFERENCE ONLY) Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 025001 – EXISTING PHOTOS (FOR REFERENCE ONLY)

Photos of Existing Potlatch Site can be referenced by going to the following link:

https://is.gd/Potlatch_Existing_Photos



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TD&H Engineering


SECTION 033000 – CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.

D. Cold weather curing procedures per ACI 308.1 section. 1.5.4.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

C. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.




2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 3. ACI 308.1 “Standard Specifications for Curing Concrete”

D. Concrete Testing Service: Contractor to engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

F. 2018 ITD Standard Spec for Highway Construction: https://apps.itd.idaho.gov/Apps/manuals/SpecBook/SpecBook18.pdf 1. Refer to Section 502. 2. Contractor to submit a cold-weather concreting plan per 502.03-G or per ACI

306.1 (whichever is more stringent).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

1. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 767/A 767M, [Class I] [Class II] zinc coated after fabrication and bending.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

D. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice.




2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, C595, C1157, Type (variable, see requirements from ACI 318 table 4.3.1 with F3 exposure. Color gray.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size 1 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.4 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. Verify all admixtures with the Engineer of Record and Architect.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,

Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.




F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

G. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

H. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

1. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler: Sikaflex -1csl. 1. Verify joint filler and sealer are compatible products.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 and ACI 318-14 with exposure class F3.

B. Cementitious Materials: Use ACI 318-14 table 19.3.2.1 and the specified concrete type based on F3 exposure. Coordinate with concrete supplier, Engineer and Architect to select mix design to ensure F3 exposure requirements.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. All exposed slab on grade, walls, and footings: a. Compressive Strength (28 day): 4,500 psi b. Cement Type: ASTM C150, or ASTM C595, or ASTM C1157 (follow the

requirements of ACI 318-11 table 4.3.1 for F3 exposure.) c. Water-Cement Ratio: 0.40 by weight, maximum




d. Air content (do not use with trowel finish): 5% e. Slump: 4” +/- 1” f. F3 exposure requirements from ACI318-14 table 19.3.2.1

2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F , reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.




B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.

2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 or ITD 502.03-G.

D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.

3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with

tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.




C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1 section 1.7 “Curing in cold weather”. Follow submittal procedure in ACI 308.1 section 1.5.4 : Submit cold weather curing procedures at least 1 month prior to cold weather concreting. 1. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a

continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Contractor will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 CONCRETE FINISHING TD&H Engineering


SECTION 033500 – CONCRETE FINISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Finishing concrete floors 2. Floor surface treatment

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Prepared concrete floors ready to

receive finish; control and formed expansion and contraction joints and joint devices

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute: 1. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete 2. ACI 302.1 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction 3. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 4. ACI 360R – Design of Slabs on Ground 5. ACI RAP-6 (Vertical and Overhead Spall Repair by Hand Application)

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and of

Levelness Using the F-number System

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures

B. Product Data: Submit data on concrete hardener, sealer, curing compounds, coatings, and slip resistant treatment, compatibilities, and limitations


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on maintenance renewal of applied coatings


A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301and ACI 302.1

B. Provide results of concrete cylinder test to Structural Engineer within 2 days of test.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by the manufacturer




1.7 MOCK-UP

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for mockup

B. Construct mock-up area under conditions similar to those, which will exist during actual placing, three feet long by three feet wide, with specified finishes, and coatings applied

C. Locate where directed by Architect

D. Incorporate accepted mockup as part of Work

E. Remove unacceptable mockup as directed by Architect

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's packaging including application instructions

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site

B. Temporary Lighting: Minimum 200 W light source, placed 8 feet above floor surface, for each 425 sq ft of floor being finished

C. Do not finish floors until interior ambient temperature is above of 50 degrees F

D. Ventilation: Sufficient to prevent injurious gases from temporary heat or other sources affecting concrete

1.10 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions

B. Coordinate the Work with concrete floor placement and concrete floor curing

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Dayton Superior Corporation 2. Euclid Chemical Company 3. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc 4. W.R Meadows, Inc 5. Sika Corporation U.S. 6. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

2.2 COMPOUNDS - HARDENERS AND SEALERS

A. Sealer: high performance silane based reactive water repellent penetrating sealer. 1. Basis of Design:

a. Sikagard-705L by Sika Corporation U.S. b. Or approved equal.

B. Curing: as specified in Section 03 33 00

C. Hardener: non-yellowing, liquid type




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions

B. Verify floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the Work of this section

C. Provide concrete cylinder testing at 5, 10, 15days, in accordance with ACI 318: 5.6.

3.2 FLOOR FINISHING

A. Cure concrete floor surfaces as specified in Section 03 33 00

B. Finish concrete floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1

C. Broom finish surfaces which are indicated to be exposed

3.3 SURFACE TREATMENT

A. Apply sealer on floor and wall surfaces

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances

B. Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness For Exposed Concrete Floors: 1/8 inch in 10 ft C. Correct defects in defined traffic floor by grinding or removal and replacement of defective

Work. 1. Areas requiring corrective Work will be identified 2. Re-measure corrected areas by same process



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 METAL FABRICATIONS Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Metal bollards.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor bolts.

C. Related Specification Sections: 1. 033000 Cast-in-place Concrete 2. 099000 Painting and Coating 3. 133419 Metal Building Systems


A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.




B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

B. Water-Based Primer: Emulsion type, anticorrosive primer for mildly corrosive environments that is resistant to flash rusting when applied to cleaned steel, complying with MPI#107 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

E. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete".

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.




2.7 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe 1/4-inch wall-thickness rectangular steel tubing.

B. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.

2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.9 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,

"Commercial Blast Cleaning." 3. Items Indicated to Receive Primers Specified in Section 099600 "High-

Performance Coatings": SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 4. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:




1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

C. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.

B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 PAINTING Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 099000 - PAINTING

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and field application of paints.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and

Applications.

B. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America: 1. PDCA - Architectural Painting Specification Manual.

C. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings: 1. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Manual.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit data on finishing products and special coating.

C. Samples: 1. Submit paper chip samples illustrating range of colors available for each surface

finishing product scheduled.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.





A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

C. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

D. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside temperature ranges required by paint product manufacturer.

C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow when relative humidity is outside humidity ranges, or moisture content of surfaces exceed those required by paint product manufacturer.

D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

E. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.

F. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candle measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.10 SEQUENCING

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Work sequence.

B. Sequence application to the following: 1. Do not apply finish coats until paintable sealant is applied.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for paints and coatings.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINTS AND COATINGS

A. Products of the following manufacturer are the basis of the contract documents: 1. Sherwin Williams.

B. Other Approved Manufacturers allowed to submit substitutions: 1. Benjamin Moore Paint Co. 2. Columbia Paint Co. 3. Devoe Paint Co. 4. Fuller-O’Brien. 5. Kelly-Moore Paints 6. Kwal Paint/The Comex Group 7. PPG Architectural Finishes. 8. Rodda Paint 9. Substitutions: Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements

2.2 EXTERIOR PRIMERS

A. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1:

Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).

2.3 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Epoxy: high solids, high build, fast drying, polyamide epoxy designed to protect steel and concrete in industrial exposures. 1. Sherwin-Williams; Macropoxy 646 (B58W610): Applied at a dry film thickness of

not less than 5.0 mils.

2.4 COMPONENTS

A. Coatings: Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Prepare coatings: 1. To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to

homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive Work as instructed by product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report conditions capable of affecting proper application.

D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces capable of affecting work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings exhibiting surface defects.

C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes.

D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium or tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

E. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.

F. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Prime metal items including shop primed items.

3.3 EXISTING WORK

A. Extend existing paint and coatings installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations and as specified.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

B. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless specified otherwise.

C. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.

E. Prime concealed surfaces of interior wood surfaces scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with thinner.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Collect waste material which may constitute fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.




3.7 SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES

A. Steel - Unprimed: 1. One coat of epoxy primer. 2. Two coats of epoxy, semi-gloss.

B. Steel - Shop Primed: 1. Touch-up with epoxy primer. 2. Two coats of epoxy, semi-gloss.

END OF DIVISION 099000


Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 RUBBER MATTING Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 099610 – RUBBER MATTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rubber matting.

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

C. Shop Drawing: showing complete installation and seam location over entire floor area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Basis of Design Product: Custom Cut Dyno Alley Mats 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Full length and width of containment area (custom cut).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Rubber Matting Installation: 1. Install rubber matting on entirety of floor slab, throughout entire containment area, under

tanks, plumbing, etc. 2. Install rubber matting level and flush and per manufacturer’s requirements. 3. Install rubber matting tight to walls (no gaps). 4. Minimize seams as much as practical (no gaps where seams occur).



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 STORAGE TANKS Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 119010 – STORAGE TANKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Storage Tanks

B. Submittals: 1. Product Data: For each type of product. 2. Shop Drawings showing tank and port placements.

C. Related Sections: 1. DIV 22 – Plumbing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STORAGE TANKS

A. Contractor to provide and install storage tanks, as specified and as shown in the drawings.

B. Basis of Design: Snyder Industries, Inc. or approved equal (see DIV 1 for substitution requirements).

C. Product: 10,500 gallon storage tanks (6 total). 1. Vertical poly tanks opaque (white). 2. Standard weight. 3. Diameter: +/- 142.4” 4. Height: +/- 178.9” 5. Self-supporting (no framework required). 6. All weather ultraviolet (UVA & UBA) resistant. 7. Suitable polymer material to withstand storage of salt brine solution with a specific

gravity of 1.18, and magnesium chloride, and boost solutions. 8. Top fill access port. 9. Suitable flat areas for valve, plumbing, and fitting installation. 10. Tie down points for secure mounting to a fixed pad. 11. Valves, pumps and other plumbing attachments to be provided and installed by plumber. 12. Unlimited port quantities (see plumbing drawings for specific port placements).


Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 STORAGE TANKS Castellaw Kom Architects


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SHIPPING:

A. Consult manufacturer’s guidelines for shipping and storage instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. Consult manufacturer’s guidelines for use and installation instructions.

3.3 CLEANING:

A. Contractor to clean tanks for new appearance. Remove strap markpings, handprints, and all markings created during shipping and installation.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 133419 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS

(ALTERNATE #1)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Structural-steel framing. 2. Metal roof panels. 3. Metal fascia panels. 4. Accessories.


A. Product Data: For each type of metal building system component.

B. Shop Drawings: For metal building system components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal building systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data and calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Submit stamped shop drawings to Architect. Architect will review shop drawings and then submit to the Division of Building Safety for their review and approval.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Manufacturer Accreditation: Statement that metal building system and components were designed and produced by a manufacturer accredited according to the International Accreditation Service's AC472.

C. Metal Building System Certificates: For each type of metal building system, from manufacturer.

1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include the following:

a. Name and location of Project.




b. Order number. c. Name of manufacturer. d. Name of Contractor. e. Building dimensions including width, length, height, and roof slope. f. Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI

standards for cold-rolled steel, including edition dates of each standard. g. Governing building code and year of edition. h. Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow

load, deflection, wind loads/speeds and exposure, seismic design category or effective peak velocity-related acceleration/peak acceleration, and auxiliary loads (cranes).

i. Load Combinations: Indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads, according to governing building code.

j. Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance factors.

D. Material test reports.

E. Source quality-control reports.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer.

1. Accreditation: According to the International Accreditation Service's AC472. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of comprehensive engineering analysis

and Shop Drawings by a professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located.

B. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who specializes in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer.

C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

D. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 360, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," for design requirements and allowable stresses.




E. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" for design requirements and allowable stresses.

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Metal Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Weathertightness Warranty for Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that leak or otherwise fail to remain weathertight within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. A&S Building Systems, Inc.; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. 2. Alliance Steel, Inc. 3. American Buildings Company; Division of Magnatrax Corp. 4. American Steel Building Co., Inc. 5. BC Steel Buildings, Inc. 6. Behlen Mfg. Co. 7. Bigbee Steel Buildings, Inc. 8. Butler Manufacturing Company; a BlueScope Steel company. 9. CBC Steel Buildings; Division of Magnatrax Corp. 10. Ceco Building Systems; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. 11. Chief Buildings; Division of Chief Industries, Inc. 12. Elite Structures, Inc. 13. Garco Building Systems; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. 14. Gulf States Manufacturers, Inc.; Division of Magnatrax Corp. 15. Inland Buildings; Subsidiary of Behlen Mfg. Co. 16. Kirby Building Systems; Division of Magnatrax Corp. 17. Mesco Building Solutions; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. 18. Metallic Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. 19. Metco Metal Supply.




20. Mid-West Steel Building Company; Division of NCI Building Systems, L.P. 21. Nucor Building Systems. 22. Oakland Metal Buildings, Inc. 23. Olympia Steel Building Systems. 24. Package Industries, Inc. 25. Pinnacle Structures, Inc. 26. Robertson Building Systems; an NCI company. 27. Ruffin Building Systems, Inc. 28. Schulte Building Systems, LLP. 29. Spirco Manufacturing. 30. Star Building Systems; an NCI company. 31. Tyler Building Systems, L.P. 32. USA, Inc. 33. VP Buildings; a United Dominion company. 34. Vulcan Steel Structures, Inc. 35. Whirlwind Building Systems. 36. Approved equal.

2.2 METAL BUILDING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Delegated Design: Design metal building system, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Metal building systems shall be designed according to procedures in MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual."

1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Loads: As required by MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual." 3. Deflection Limits: Design metal building system assemblies to withstand design

loads with deflections as required for building type/use. a. Design secondary-framing system to accommodate deflection of primary

framing and construction tolerances, and to maintain clearances at openings.

4. Drift Limits: Engineer building structure to withstand design loads with drift limits no greater than required for building type/use.

5. Metal panel assemblies shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASTM E 1592.

C. Seismic Performance: Metal building systems shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.




1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient material surfaces.

E. Air Infiltration for Metal Roof Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) of roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at negative test-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

F. Air Infiltration for Metal Fascia Panels: Air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.3 L/s per sq. m) of wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

G. Water Penetration for Metal Roof Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at test-pressure difference of 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa).

H. Water Penetration for Metal Facia Panels: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a wind-load design pressure of not less than 2.86 lbf/sq. ft. (137 Pa).

I. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580.

2.3 STRUCTURAL-STEEL FRAMING

A. Primary Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary-framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and lean-to frames; rafter, rake, and canopy beams; sidewall, intermediate, end-wall, and corner columns; and wind bracing.

1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates, bearing plates, and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly.

2. Frame Configuration: Single gable. 3. Exterior Column Type: Uniform depth. 4. Rafter Type: Uniform depth. 5. Bracing: do not install bracing where it will prevent tanks from being replaced by

Owner in future.

B. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for field-bolted assembly.

C. Secondary Framing: Manufacturer's standard secondary framing, including purlins, girts, eave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous structural members. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate framing from either cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, prepainted with coil coating.

D. Bolts: Provide plain-finish bolts for structural-framing components that are primed or finish painted. Provide zinc-plated or hot-dip galvanized bolts for structural-framing components that are galvanized.

E. Finish: Factory primed. Apply specified primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.




2.4 METAL ROOF PANELS

A. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels : Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be installed by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.

1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 26 gage 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal thickness.

a. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches (305 mm)o.c. 3. Panel Coverage: 36 inches (914 mm). 4. Panel Height: 1.5 inches (38 mm).

2.5 METAL FASCIA PANELS

A. Tapered-Rib-Profile, Exposed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised, trapezoidal major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs; designed to be installed by lapping side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed fasteners in side laps.

1. Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 26 gage, 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal thickness.

a. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer. b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Major-Rib Spacing: 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. 3. Panel Coverage: 36 inches (914 mm). 4. Panel Height: 1.5 inches (38 mm).

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer and as specified. Fabricate and finish accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including copings, fasciae, corner units, ridge closures, clips, sealants,




gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal roof panels unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fascia Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels unless otherwise indicated.

D. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match adjacent metal panels.

E. Gutters: Formed from 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal-thickness, metallic-coated steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match roof fascia and rake trim. Match profile of gable trim, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2438-mm-) long sections, sized according to SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual."

1. Gutter Supports: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters. 2. Strainers: Bronze, copper, or aluminum wire ball type at outlets.

F. Downspouts: Formed from 0.022-inch (0.56-mm) nominal-thickness, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coating; finished to match metal wall panels. Fabricate in minimum 10-foot- (3-m-) long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets.

1. Mounting Straps: Fabricated from same material and finish as gutters.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate product.

B. Testing: Test and inspect shop connections for metal buildings according to the following:

1. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections shall be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. General: Design components and field connections required for erection to permit easy assembly.




1. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams, and instruction manuals.

2. Fabricate structural framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, and location. Members shall be free of cracks, tears, and ruptures.

B. Tolerances: Comply with MBMA's "Metal Building Systems Manual" for fabrication and erection tolerances.

C. Primary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to size and section, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly.

D. Secondary Framing: Shop fabricate framing components to size and section by roll-forming or break-forming, with baseplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form, punch, drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary framing.

E. Metal Panels: Fabricate and finish metal panels at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION OF STRUCTURAL FRAMING

A. Erect metal building system according to manufacturer's written erection instructions and erection drawings.

B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer.

C. Set structural framing accurately in locations and to elevations indicated, according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection.

D. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and

plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.




E. Align and adjust structural framing before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with framing. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and

mean temperature when structure will be completed and in service.

F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist-cure grout for not less than seven days after placement.

1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts installed according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for bolt type and joint type specified.

a. Joint Type: Snug tightened or pretensioned.

G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing level, plumb, rigid, secure, and true to line. Field bolt secondary framing to clips attached to primary framing.

1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. 2. Locate and space wall girts to suit openings such as doors and windows. 3. Locate canopy framing as indicated. 4. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors,

windows, louvers, ventilators, and other penetrations of roof and walls.

H. Steel Joists: Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Standard Specifications and Load Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders," joist manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently

fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to

ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts unless high-

strength structural bolts are required by the manufacturer. 5. Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or

A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements.

6. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.

I. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidewalls where indicated on erection drawings.




1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. 2. Locate interior end-bay bracing only where indicated. 3. Do not install bracing where it will prevent tanks from being replaced by Owner in

future.

J. Erection Tolerances: Maintain erection tolerances of structural framing within AISC 303.

3.2 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Anchor metal panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Field cut metal panels as required for doors, windows, and other openings. Cut openings as small as possible, neatly to size required, and without damage to adjacent metal panel finishes.

a. Field cutting of metal panels by torch is not permitted unless approved in writing by manufacturer.

2. Install metal panels perpendicular to structural supports unless otherwise indicated.

3. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures at perimeter of openings and similar elements. Fasten with self-tapping screws.

4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 5. Locate metal panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports with end

laps in alignment. 6. Lap metal flashing over metal panels to allow moisture to run over and off the

material.

B. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Install screw fasteners using power tools with controlled torque adjusted to compress EPDM washers tightly without damage to washers, screw threads, or metal panels. Install screws in predrilled holes.

1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply metal panels and associated items for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer.

D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants recommended by metal panel manufacturer.




1. Seal metal panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant the full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Provide metal roof panels of full length from eave to ridge unless otherwise indicated or restricted by shipping limitations.

1. Install ridge caps as metal roof panel work proceeds. 2. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves and rakes.

Fasten with self-tapping screws.

B. Lap-Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with exposed fasteners at each lapped joint, at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.

1. Provide metal-backed sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal roof panels.

2. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal roof panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.

3. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps and on side laps of nesting-type metal panels, on side laps of ribbed or fluted metal panels, and elsewhere as needed to make metal panels weatherproof to driving rains.

4. At metal panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.

C. Metal Fascia Panels: Align bottom of metal panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-drilling or self-tapping screws. Flash and seal metal panels with weather closures where fasciae meet soffits, along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.

3.4 METAL FASCIA PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal fascia panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts, extending full height of building, unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, begin metal panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing.

2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal fascia panels. 3. Rigidly fasten base end of metal fascia panels and allow eave end free

movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 4. Flash and seal metal fascia panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at

perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. 5. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.




6. Install flashing and trim as metal fascia panel work proceeds. 7. Align bottom of metal fascia panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-

drilling or self-tapping screws.

B. Metal Fascia Panels: Install metal wall panels on exterior side of girts. Attach metal wall panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly, including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

2. Install components for a complete metal wall panel assembly, including trim, copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.

3. Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with corrosion-resistant coating, by applying rubberized-asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance.

2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted-and-soldered or lapped-and-sealed joints. Attach gutters to eave with gutter hangers spaced as required for gutter size, but not more than 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. using manufacturer's standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.

D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely 1 inch (25 mm) away from walls;




locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches (1524 mm) o.c. in between.

1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts to direct water away from building. 2. Tie downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. High-Strength, Field-Bolted Connections: Connections shall be tested and inspected during installation according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

2. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, field-welded connections shall be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at inspector's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

C. Product will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


Potlatch Containment Facility – FM22001 SECTION 22 0500

Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBINGCovenant Engineering


SECTION 22 0500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.2. Transition fittings.3. Dielectric fittings.4. Mechanical sleeve seals.5. Sleeves.6. Escutcheons.7. Grout.8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.9. Painting and finishing.10. Concrete bases.11. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.3. PE: Polyethylene plastic.




4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings.2. Dielectric fittings.3. Mechanical sleeve seals.4. Escutcheons.


A. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:




1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.d. JCM Industries.e. Smith-Blair, Inc.f. Viking Johnson.

2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.3. Underground Piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type

coupling.4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVCone-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.


a. Eslon Thermoplastics.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.


a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVCfour-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.


a. NIBCO INC.b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.

E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.





a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.b. Fernco, Inc.c. Mission Rubber Company.d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig (1725-kPa) minimum working pressure at 180 deg F (82 deg C).


a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Eclipse, Inc.d. Epco Sales, Inc.e. Hart Industries, International, Inc.f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.


a. Capitol Manufacturing Co.b. Central Plastics Company.c. Epco Sales, Inc.d. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. Central Plastics Company.d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig (1035- or 2070-kPa) minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.




F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).


a. Calpico, Inc.b. Lochinvar Corp.

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig (2070-kPa) minimum working pressure at 225 deg F (107 deg C).


a. Perfection Corp.b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.d. Victaulic Co. of America.

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.b. Calpico, Inc.c. GPT Industriesd. Metraflex Co.e. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDMinterlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates Nylon Polymer. Include two for each sealing element.4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.




1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

H. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.9 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.




C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish.c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with

polished chrome-plated finish.g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.




2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 (DN 150).b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 (DN 150) and larger, penetrating gypsum-

board partitions.c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches (150 mm) in diameter.2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches (150 mm) and larger in diameter.3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements

required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

Q. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

S. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

T. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.




B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix.

J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

K. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.

1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.

M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.




3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.




6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.7. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as

specified in Division 03.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.9 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS …Covenant Engineering


SECTION 22 0513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers.2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet (1000 m) above sea level.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.




2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation:

1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers:

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:




1. Permanent-split capacitor.2. Split phase.3. Capacitor start, inductor run.4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPINGCovenant Engineering


SECTION 22 0519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.2. Filled-system thermometers.3. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.4. Light-activated thermometers.5. Thermowells.6. Dial-type pressure gages.7. Gage attachments.8. Test plugs.9. Test-plug kits.10. Sight flow indicators.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 21 Section "Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping" for fire-protection water-service meters outside the building.

2. Division 21 fire-suppression piping Sections for fire-protection pressure gages.3. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic water meters and

combined domestic and fire-protection water-service meters outside the building.4. Division 22 Section " Domestic Water Piping" for water meters inside the building.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ashcroft Inc.2. Ernst Flow Industries.3. Marsh Bellofram.4. Miljoco Corporation.5. Nanmac Corporation.6. Noshok.7. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.8. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.9. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.10. Trerice, H. O. Co.11. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.12. Weiss Instruments, Inc.13. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.14. Winters Instruments - U.S.

B. Standard: ASME B40.200.

C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch (76-mm) nominal diameter.

D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F .

E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, with unified-inch screw threads.

F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch (13 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.

G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch (6.4 or 9.4 mm) in diameter; stainless steel.

H. Window: Plain glass.

I. Ring: Stainless steel.

J. Element: Bimetal coil.

K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.

L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.2 FILLED-SYSTEM THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Vapor-Actuated Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:




a. Ashcroft Inc.b. Marsh Bellofram.c. Miljoco Corporation.d. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.e. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.f. Trerice, H. O. Co.g. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.3. Case: Sealed type, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch (114-mm)nominal diameter.4. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element.5. Movement: Mechanical, dampening type, with link to pressure element and connection

to pointer.6. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in

deg F.7. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.8. Window: Glass.9. Ring: Metal.10. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable, 180 degrees in vertical plane; with

ASME B1.1 screw threads.11. Thermal System: Liquid-filled bulb in copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem and

of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

12. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.

2.3 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:


a. Trerice, H. O. Co.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.3. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch (152-mm) nominal size.4. Case Form: Back angle unless otherwise indicated.5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue organic liquid.6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F.7. Window: Glass or plastic.8. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.


9. Connector: 3/4 inch (19 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

B. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:





a. Flo Fab Inc.b. Miljoco Corporation.c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.e. Trerice, H. O. Co.f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.g. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200.3. Case: Cast aluminum; 7-inch (178-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated.4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated.5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue organic liquid.6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F.7. Window: Glass.8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.


9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.4 LIGHT-ACTIVATED THERMOMETERS

A. Direct-Mounted, Light-Activated Thermometers:


a. Flo Fab Inc.b. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.c. Trerice, H. O. Co.d. Weiss Instruments, Inc.e. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.f. Winters Instruments - U.S.

2. Case: Metal; 7-inch (178-mm) nominal size unless otherwise indicated.3. Scale(s): Deg F.4. Case Form: Adjustable angle.5. Connector: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw threads.6. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.


7. Display: Digital.8. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 deg F (1 deg C).




2.5 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200.2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES CSA.5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, (DN 15, DN 20, or NPS 25,)

ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch (13, 19, and 25 mm), with ASME B1.1 screw

threads.8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.6 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:


a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.b. Ashcroft Inc.c. Ernst Flow Industries.d. Flo Fab Inc.e. Marsh Bellofram.f. Miljoco Corporation.g. Noshok.h. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.i. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.j. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.k. Trerice, H. O. Co.l. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.m. Weiss Instruments, Inc.n. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.o. Winters Instruments - U.S.p.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100.3. Case: Liquid-filled Sealed type(s); cast aluminum; 4-1/2-inch (114-mm) nominal

diameter.4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1

pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.




7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.9. Window: Glass.10. Ring: Metal.11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.7 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 (DN 8 or DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.8 TEST PLUGS


1. Flow Design, Inc.2. Miljoco Corporation.3. National Meter, Inc.4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.6. Trerice, H. O. Co.7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 (DN 8) or NPS 1/2 (DN 15), ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F (3450 kPa at 93 deg C).

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in piping tees.

B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if required to match sizes.

C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.




D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.

E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the most readable position.

H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.

I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.

J. Install test plugs in piping tees.

K. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.

L. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:1. Direct-mounted, light-activated type.2.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F.

C.




3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, metal case

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi.

B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBINGCovenant Engineering


SECTION 22 0523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Polypropylene ball valves.


1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

3. Division 33 water distribution piping Sections for general-duty and specialty valves for site construction piping.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.




B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection.2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger.2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller.4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5

plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch (50-mm) stem extensions and the following features:




1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 POLYPROPYLENE BALL VALVES

A. Full-Port, Ball Valves:


a. Banjo

2. Description:

a. Body Design: Six-bolt or stubby.b. Body Material: glass reinforced polypropylene.c. Ends: Cam lock or Threaded.d. Seats: PTFE or FKM.e. Stem and Bolts: Stainless steel.f. Ball: Stainless steel.g. Port: Full for 1/4” through 3”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.




D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or gate valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

3.5 BRINE AND BOOST VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 3 (DN 50) and Smaller:

1. Polypropylene Valves: May be provided with cam lock or threaded ends.2. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port with stainless steel trim.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 HANGARS AND SUPPORTS FOR …Covenant Engineering


SECTION 22 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Fiberglass pipe hangers.2. Fiberglass strut systems.3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts.4. Fastener systems.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 21 fire-suppression piping Sections for pipe hangers for fire-suppression piping.3. Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides

and anchors.4. Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment"

for vibration isolation devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.


A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

3. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS





B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers.2. Metal framing systems.3. Fiberglass strut systems.4. Pipe stands.5. Equipment supports.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers.2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.

D. Welding certificates.


A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIBERGLASS PIPE HANGERS

A. Clevis-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: Similar to MSS SP-58, Type 1, steel pipe hanger except hanger is made of fiberglass or fiberglass-reinforced resin.

2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, washer, and nuts made of fiberglass or polyurethane.

B. Strap-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers:

1. Description: Similar to MSS SP-58, Type 9 or Type 10, steel pipe hanger except hanger is made of fiberglass-reinforced resin.

2. Hanger Rod and Fittings: Continuous-thread rod, washer, and nuts made of stainless steel.

2.2 FIBERGLASS STRUT SYSTEMS





1. Allied Tube & Conduit.2. Atkore International, Aikinstrut Fiberglass3. Champion Fiberglass, Inc.4. Cooper B-Line, Inc.5. SEASAFE, INC.; a Gibraltar Industries Company.

B. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly similar to MFMA-4 for supporting multiple parallel pipes.

1. Channels: Continuous slotted fiberglass channel with inturned lips.2. Channel Nuts: Fiberglass nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and,

when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.3. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of fiberglass.

2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.2. Clement Support Services.3. ERICO International Corporation.4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.5. PHS Industries, Inc.6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc.7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc.8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc.9. Value Engineered Products, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig (688-kPa) ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig (688-kPa) or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig (862-kPa) minimum compressive strength.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches (50 mm) beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.




B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; hot dipped galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Fiberglass Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

G. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

H. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.




I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

K. Insulated Piping:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick.

b. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick.c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch

(1.52 mm) thick.d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch

(1.91 mm) thick.e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch

(2.67 mm) thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield.

6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. Stands shall be hot dipped galvanized.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.




3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.3. Remove welding flux immediately.4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so

contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches (40 mm).

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use fiberglass pipe hangers and fiberglass strut systems for hostile environment applications.

D. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.

G. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING …Covenant Engineering


SECTION 22 0553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels.2. Warning signs and labels.3. Pipe labels.4. Stencils.5. Valve tags.6. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White.3. Background Color: Black.4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

B. Letter Color: White.

C. Background Color: Black.

D. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F (71 deg C).

E. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch (64 by 19 mm).

F. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches (600 mm), 1/2 inch (13 mm) for viewing distances up to 72 inches (1830 mm), and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

G. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

H. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.




I. Label Content: Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification instructions.

2.3 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.

2.4 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch (13-mm) numbers.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch (A4) bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.5 WARNING TAGS

A. Warning Tags: Preprinted or partially preprinted, accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing.1. Nomenclature: Large-size primary caption such as "DANGER," "CAUTION," or "DO NOT

OPERATE."2. Color: Yellow background with black lettering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.




3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09.

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device.2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping.5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.6. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 BRINE, BOOST & MAG SYSTEM PIPINGCovenant Engineering


SECTION 22 1116 - BRINE, BOOST & MAG SYSTEM PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brine system pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.2. Encasement for piping.3. Specialty valves.4. Flexible connectors.


A. Seismic Performance: Brine System piping and support and installation shall with stand effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Specialty valves.2. Transition fittings.3. Dielectric fittings.4. Flexible connectors.

B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:




1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 PVC, Schedule 80 Pipe: ASTM D 1785.

A. PVC, Schedule 80 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467.

B. PVC, Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464.

2.3 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 and ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80.2. PVC Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464.

2.4 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free, unless otherwise indicated; full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.

B. Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.




2.5 ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.2. Flexicraft Industries.3. Flex Pression, Ltd.4. Flex-Weld, Inc.5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.6. Mercer Rubber Co.7. Metraflex, Inc.8. Proco Products, Inc.9. Tozen Corporation.10. Unaflex, Inc.11. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company12. .

B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1070 kPa).2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end

copper tube.3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 150 psig (1380 kPa).2. End Connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple.3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.




B. Install piping level and plumb.

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.

D. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

G. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

H. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

I. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

J. Install piping free of sags and bends.

K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

L. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages.

M. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

N. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

O. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.




2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

E. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer.

2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

F. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

3.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each pump.

B. Install hose flexible connectors in piping.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.




4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm).

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) and Smaller: 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4 (DN 25 and DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod.3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod.4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.5. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.6. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.7. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and Smaller: 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2 (DN 80 and DN 90): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod.7. NPS 6 (DN 150): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.8. NPS 8 to NPS 12 (DN 200 to DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

I. Install vinyl-coated hangers for CPVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 36 inches (900 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.2. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.3. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)

rod.4. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)

rod.5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.6. NPS 8 (DN 200): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

J. Install supports for vertical CPVC piping every 60 inches (1500 mm) for NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller, and every 72 inches (1800 mm) for NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) and larger.

K. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PEX piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:




1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: 32 inches (815 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

L. Install hangers for vertical PEX piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).

M. Install vinyl-coated hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.2. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm)

rod.3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)

rod.4. NPS 6 (DN 150): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.5. NPS 8 (DN 200): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

N. Install supports for vertical PVC piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).

O. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.




3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.7. The Owner shall witness the initiation and conclusion of all pressure tests.

D. Piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for

application where used and are clean and ready for use.8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean piping as follows:




1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground copper tubing.

C. Exposed brine, boost and mag piping shall be one of the following:1. PVC, Schedule 80 pipe socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

3.13 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

2. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 BRINE, BOOST & MAG SYSTEM SPECIALTIESCovenant Engineering


SECTION 22 1119 - BRINE, BOOST & MAG SYSTEM PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following piping specialties:1. Strainers.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Piping Specialties: 125 psig (860 kPa), unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRAINERS

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.2. Body: Polypropylene reinforced fiberglass




3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated.5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 0.020 inch (0.51 mm).b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): 0.045 inch (1.14 mm).c. Strainers NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: 0.10 inch (2.54 mm).

6. Drain: Hose-end drain valve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve, water pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, and pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:1. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers.2. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:




1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning piping specialties and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 BRINE, BOOST & MAG SYSTEM PUMPSCovenant Engineering


SECTION 22 1123 – BRINE, BOOST & MAG SYSTEM PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:1. Horizontally mounted, in-line, centrifugal pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.




1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTALLY MOUNTED, IN-LINE, CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


1. Banjo

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, single-stage, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps designed for installation with pump and motor shaft mounted horizontal.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Casing: Radially split with threaded companion-flange connections for pumps with NPS 2 (DN 50) pipe connections and flanged connections for pumps with NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) pipe connections.

2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, closed, and keyed to shaft.3. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft with deflector, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve.

Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal.4. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon-steel rotating ring, stainless-steel spring, ceramic seat,

and rubber bellows and gasket.5. Bearings: permanently lubricated; bronze-journal or ball type.

D. Motor: Single speed, totally enclosed fan cooled; and resiliently or rigidly mounted to pump casing.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, centrifugal pumps with shaft(s) horizontal.

D. Install vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps with shaft vertical.

E. Pump Mounting: Install horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps with cast-iron base mounted on concrete base using restrained spring isolators.

1. Minimum Deflection: 1/4 inch (6 mm).2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise

indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22, drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the following pumps:

a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps.b. Horizontally mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps.c. Vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps.

2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 22 Section "General-




Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" and comply with requirements for strainers specified in Division 22 Section "Brine Piping Specialties."

3. Install pressure gage at suction of each pump and pressure gage at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gages and snubbers specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with Division 26 Sections for electrical connections, and wiring methods.

E. Connect thermostats to pumps that they control.

F. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and time-delay relay.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.


ITD FM-22001 Potlatch Containment Facility SECTION 260000

Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 ELECTRICAL Castellaw Kom Architects / KB Engineering


SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work in this Section.

B. Electrical scope of work can be described as, but not limited to the following: 1. Electrical Systems - modification and installation of electrical systems required to

accommodate project design requirements (see drawings), per 2017 NEC. The following summary includes, but is not limited to the following design-build electrical work:

a. Electrical Power: i. Safe-Off Requirements- Limited miscellaneous electrical demolition and

“safe-off” off existing circuits as required. ii. Panel ‘SS’ (existing)

a. Remove (3) 20A-1P circuit breakers and install a 90A-3P circuit breaker to serve the new containment facility sub-panel ‘TT’.

b. Install a 90 Amp, 3-phase, feeder from Panel ‘SS’ to Panel ‘TT’. iii. Panel ‘TT’ (new)

a. Install a new panelboard ‘TT’ on the east side of the new containment facility next to the pump controllers. Panel ‘TT’ shall be fed from a 90A-3P feeder from Panel ‘SS’.

b. Panel ‘TT’ shall be 100 Amp, 208Y/120V, 3 Phase, 4 Wire, Surface mounted, in a NEMA 4X enclosure. Panel shall be fully rated for the available fault current. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on. Panelboard bus may be aluminum.

c. Provide circuit breakers to accommodate the following electrical loads in the new containment facility:

i. Lighting ii. Receptacles iii. Brine Transfer Pump iv. Boost Transfer Pump v. Mag Chloride Transfer Pump vi. Four spare circuit breakers

iv. Install receptacles as indicated on the drawings. All receptacles shall be GFCI type, weather resistant, heavy duty industrial grade, with a weatherproof cover.

v. Install a start/stop controller for each transfer pump. The controller shall be a combination, non-reversing, 10 HP starter with fusible disconnect in a NEMA 4X enclosure. Provide a RUN pilot light for each starter.

vi. Install a transfer switch between the branch circuits of the BRINE transfer pump and the BOOST transfer pump. Facility personnel shall only be able to energize one of the two pumps at any given time to avoid overloading the power panel.

vii. All wiring shall be in rigid galvanized conduit.




b. Lighting: i. Base Bid:

• Provide new exterior LED lighting on existing buildings. See drawings for locations.

ii. Alt. 1: provide new LED lighting on ceiling of PEMB roof canopy. See drawings for locations.

• Provide an average maintained illuminance of 30 foot candles or higher under the roof canopy.

• Provide a manual toggle switch near the pump controllers.

2. Existing Conditions- Field verify/investigate existing conditions and recently completed work prior to bidding. Existing photos of the electrical can be accessed by going to the following link:

a. https://is.gd/Potlatch_Existing_Photos

C. Provide complete design, secure all permits and approvals, and provide a complete electrical system for the services indicated in this specification, shown on the Drawings, and as required (including but not limited to selective demolition, new panel, and maintaining existing power and existing lighting), operating, tested and approved.

D. Drawings schematically indicate locations of electrical work required. Field verify

extent of work prior to bidding. E. Project close-out, As-Built Documents and Operations & Maintenance Data to be

provided as required under Division 1 requirements. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled craftsman thoroughly familiar with the specified materials, methods and requirements needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Except as may otherwise be called for on the Drawings or in this Section, provide only such materials and methods as are required to comply with pertinent requirements of the governmental agencies having jurisdiction. System designs to meet all adopted codes (national, state and local) by those agencies having jurisdiction.

C. Warranty: The Contractor shall be responsible for all work installed under this

specification. He shall make good, repair or replace, at his own expense as may be necessary, any defective work, materials or parts which may show themselves within the warranty period if said defect is due to imperfection in material, design or workmanship. 1. The warranty period shall be one year after Substantial Completion.




1.03 DESIGN

A. Prior to proceeding with installation of the work of this Section, submit product submittals to the Architect for approval. Coordinate with Drawings for additional information not indicated here. 1. Fully describe the materials and methods proposed to be used. 2. Include catalog cuts of electrical equipment, light fixtures, lamps and

materials. 3. Products are to be of "commercial" grade.

1.04 MATERIALS

A. Electrical Panel: NEMA rated for corrosive environment (4X) and sized to match

panel requirements.

B. Breakers: bolt-on, compatible and commercial rated to support electrical systems. Match existing AIC values.

C. Lighting: 1. Wall-mounted (high elevation): LytePro – LPW32-90-NW-G3-3-UNV-PCB-BZ 2. Wall-mounted (low elevation): LytePro – LPW16-50-NW-G3-3-UNV-PCB-BZ 3. Bottom-of-Structure-mounted: Atlas – PGM-80LED-PC 4. Light fixtures may be substituted with similar fixtures of the same function, look,

and performance with the Architect/Engineer’s approval.

D. Pump Disconnects: Type 4X Heavy Duty, adequately sized for pumps. May be combined with the pump controller as a combination starter/disconnect. See plumbing drawings for additional information.

E. Pump Controllers: Type 4X NEMA Contactor/Starter – Eaton Freedom Line

Enclosed Control EC-N-16 -2-4-E-X-X or equal.

F. Transfer Switch: 1. Manual transfer switch rated to carry the ampacity of one 10 HP transfer pump. 2. The transfer switch shall be located next to Panel ‘TT’ and shall be used by

personnel to switch power between two separate transfer pumps so that only two of the three transfer pumps can operate at any given time. Sub-panel ‘TT’ is sized to accommodate only two 10 HP pumps at one time. Field coordinate which two pumps are to be on the manual transfer switch with the Owner.

G. Electrical Conduit:

1. Rigid Conduit: galvanized steel in conformance with ANSI C80.3 manufactured by Allied Tube and Conduit, or Triangle PWC.

2. Fittings, Couplings and Connectors: Utilize fittings listed and approved for specific conduit or raceway system used.

H. Mounting strut: stainless steel, typical.




I. Wire and Cable: All wire shall be copper unless specifically noted otherwise, and shall be rated at 600 volts. Wire sizes 12AWG and 10AWG shall be solid, type THHN/THWN. Wire sizes 8 and larger shall be with strands, type THHN/THWN or sizes 4 and larger may be type XHHW. Minimum wire size shall be 12AWG, unless noted or required otherwise.

J. Outlet Boxes: Shall be galvanized pressed steel, of the knockout type, not less than

4” square, minimum 14 US gauge, exterior rated.

K. Power Receptacles: Shall be heavy duty, industrial grade, exterior rated, 120 Volt, 30 Amp, with weatherproof cover.

1.05 COMPLETION

A. Provide all personnel and equipment, pay all fees necessary, fully and completely test and adjust work of this Section, and secure necessary approvals from governmental agencies having jurisdiction, all at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Labeling: Label all systems closely following Agency standards and requirements.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 EARTH MOVING Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 312000 – EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation. 1. Existing soil on site is not suitable to be used as backfill.

B. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

C. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

D. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

3. All material removed can be stockpiled at Project Site; locate removed material on east side of ITD yard area (coordinate with ITD for exact placement location).

E. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

F. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.




G. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.


A. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site with General Contractor, Project Manager, Architect, and Owner prior to excavation.


A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations. 1. Existing soil on site is not suitable to be used as backfill.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3inches any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.




H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (37.5-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

3.4 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump truck to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.




B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.5 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

3.6 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip

line of remaining trees. 2. All material removed can be stockpiled at Project Site; locate removed material

on east side of ITD yard area (coordinate with ITD for exact placement location).

3.7 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows: 1. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 3. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

3.8 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.




3.9 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

3.10 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.

3.11 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


A. Testing Agency: Contractor will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.




B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

D. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.13 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match

adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.



Idaho Transportation Department – District #2 SUBDRAINAGE Castellaw Kom Architects


SECTION 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Subdrainage systems of the following types: a. Wall footing drains. b. Underground rainwater drains.

B. Related Sections: 1. 331200 Earth Moving.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DRAINAGE PIPE

A. Piping System 1:

1. Permeable piping: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) perforated pipe; ASTM D 2729. 2. Application: At perimeter footing.

B. Piping System 2:

1. Standard (solid) pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe; ASTM D 2729. 2. Application: Connecting building perimeter drains to existing site drainage

control system, match existing piping size.

C. Provide fittings and accessories of same material as pipe or compatible material for intersections, bends, transitions, and the like.

2.2 FILTER FABRIC

A. Fabric:

1. Construction: Nonwoven polypropylene. 2. Minimum weight: 4.0 ounces per square yard.

2.3 EARTHEN MATERIALS

A. Drainage Fill: Clean, non-clogging, evenly graded mixture of coarse sand and

crushed stone, natural gravel, or crushed gravel with the following sieve analysis: 1. 1-inch: with less than 10% passing #200 sieve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Engineering Layout:

1. Establish lines, grades, and locations of piping and accessories.




3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Earthwork and Trenching: Perform required excavation, backfilling, and compact-

ing in accordance with requirements of other Division 2 sections as applicable.

B. Piping Installation: 1. General: Install piping in accordance with governing authorities, except

where more stringent requirements are indicated. 2. Inspect piping before installation to detect apparent defects. Mark defective

materials and promptly remove from site. 3. Lay piping, beginning at low point of system, true to line and grade indicated

and with unbroken continuity of invert. 4. Polyvinyl chloride pipe: Install in accordance with ASTM D 2321. 5. Joint adapters: Make joints between different types of pipe or different di-

ameters of the same type of pipe with standard manufactured adapters in-tended for that purpose.

C. Filling and Backfilling: 1. Place and compact fill or backfill in uniform layers, and achieve required

compaction. 2. Take care when backfilling to avoid damaging or dislodging drainage system

components. a. Do not operate wheeled or tracked vehicles on (in contact with) filter

fabric.

D. Filter Fabric Installation: 1. Grade or shape earthen surfaces to receive filter fabric so that the fabric will

not bridge cavities in the soil or be damaged by projecting rock. 2. Lay filter fabric flat on surfaces without stretching. 3. Overlap seams a minimum of 12 inches and secure with staples or anchor

pins. 4. Secure edges of filter fabric to earthen surfaces with staples or anchor pins,

and to rock or concrete surfaces with mastic or mechanical fasteners.

3.3 WALL/FOOTING DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Impervious Fill at Footings: After concrete footings have cured and forms have been removed, place impervious fill on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing. 1. Place drainage fill adjacent to bottom of footing and below drain pipe and

aggregate to guard against erosion at footings. Dimensions: 3 inches deep maximum and 12 inches wide, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.

B. Filter Fabric: Install a liner of filter fabric from top of footing, across bottom of exca-vation, and up earthen side of excavation.

C. Bedding:

1. Place, shape, and compact a layer of filter aggregate in excavation bottom below pipe.

2. Minimum bedding thickness: 4 inches.




D. Install drainage pipe as indicated. Coordinate elevation and slope direction of exist-

ing drain tile system and install new tile accordingly to accommodate connection to existing system.

E. Backfilling:

1. Backfill with filter aggregate to provide 4-inch coverage over top of pipe. Backfill remainder of excavation with drainage fill to within 12 inches of finish grade.

2. Envelope aggregate with filter fabric. 3. Final backfill: Place and compact general fill to finish grade.


A. Piping: After installation of piping and placement of initial backfill, test piping for

crushing and obstructions. 1. Pull a mandrel with diameter of 90 percent of the pipe diameter through the

pipe. 2. Locate and replace damaged pipe or remove obstructions and retest until

mandrel passes entire length of pipe.
